Contents

Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 164
1 of 164

Summary of Content for Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual PDF

DTX900 DTX900M

EN

Owners Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specically recom- mended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25 cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number ,the larger the current han- dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom- pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specications without notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplier and head- phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting xtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso- ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional x- tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturers warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ- mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc- tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat- tery is approximately ve years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualied service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use household type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter- ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu- lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num- ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur- chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma- nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP (bottom)

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identication in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con- tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class B digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason- able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec- tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

Information for Users on Collec This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, pl legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save va and the environment which could otherwise arise from inapprop

For more information about collection and recycling of old produ point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, pleas

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to di correct method of disposal.

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON, please try to elimi- nate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line lter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con- tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth termi- nal of the three pin plug.

This applies only to products distributed by

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : DRUM TRIGGER MODULE

Model Name : DTX900/DTX900M

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference

that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus- pected.

(FCC DoC)

* YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

tion and Disposal of Old Equipment documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be

ease take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national

luable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health riate waste handling.

cts, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the

e contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

European Union] scard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the

OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur vxelstrmskllan (ntet) s lnge som den ar ansluten till vgguttaget, ven om sjlva apparaten har stngts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspndingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, slenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt ogs selvom der or slukket p apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty kyttkytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires)

For DTX900M Owners Differences from DTX900

Building on the performance and functionality of the DTX900the flagship model in our lineup of drum trigger modulesthe enhanced DTX900M model delivers added convenience. These DTX900M enhancements are described in detail below.

Reading this Owners Manual

The content of this manual is identical to that of the original DTX900 Owners Manual. With the exception of the functions described in this section, there are no other differences between the DTX900 and the DTX900M. Therefore, whenever you encounter the term DTX900 in this Owners Manual, you should inter- pret it as meaning DTX900M.

Sampling memory included as standard The DTX900M comes with 512 MB of sampling memory (SDRAM) built in. Accordingly, external audio can be sam- pled without the need for a separately-sold memory chip (DIMM).

Addition of a new Auto Power-Off function The DTX900M features an Auto Power-Off function that will help to save energy should you forget to turn it off your- self. This function automatically turns off the drum trigger module after a set period of inactivity.

Setting the Auto Power-Off function Using the following procedure, you can set the amount of time that the Auto Power-Off function waits before turning off the drum trigger module.

Shortcut for disabling the Auto Power-Off function If you hold down the [REC] button while turn- ing on the DTX900M, the Auto Power-Off function will be disabled (and the message Auto power off disabled will be displayed). This function will remain disabled until you set a new Auto Power-Off time.

IMPORTANT

Because of the addition of SDRAM, separately-sold memory chips (DIMM) can no longer be installed. Accordingly, the Optional DIMM Installation section of this Owners Manual (on pages 147 to 149) does not apply to the DTX900M.

Whenever you encounter the phrase DIMM (sold separately) in this Owners Manual, you should interpret it as meaning SDRAM (built-in).

SDRAM supports both writing and deleting of data; however, the content of this memory is cleared whenever the power is turned off.

Procedure Settings (minutes) Default setting (minutes)

[UTILITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF5] OTHER Change the AutoPowerOff setting [STORE]

off (Auto Power-Off disabled), 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120

30

NOTICE

Addition of new Trigger Setups Two new types of Trigger Setups for DTX920K are now supported. (Page 23) Accordingly, the complete Trigger Setup List is as follows. When you specify the model number, the DTX900M will automatically optimize the trigger output levels for all of your pads.

* In the default setting, PRE:02 920K Normal for DTX920K is selected.

Addition of new pad types New types of pads are now supported as follows. (Page 109) KP100, KU100, XP80, XP70, TP70S, TP70, PCY100, PCY90 Accordingly, the complete pad-type table is as follows.

Expansion of the input gain setting range The input gain setting range is expanded from between 0 and 63 to between 0 to 127. (Page 109)

The DTX900M remains charged and draws a small amount of power even when turned off. To shut it down completely, therefore, unplug it from the mains power supply.

In certain modes of operation, the Auto Power-Off function may not turn off the drum module when the set time has elapsed. We recommend, therefore, that you always turn off the drum module manually when you are finished using it.

If your drum module is connected to other equipment such as an amplifier, speakers, or a computer, but you do not intend to use it for some time, we recommend that you turn off all devices as described in their owners manuals. Doing so eliminates the risk of damage to the other equipment. If you do not want the drum module to turn off automatically when connected to other equipment, disable the Auto Power-Off function.

When the Auto Power-Off function turns off the drum module, any unsaved data will be lost. Be sure, therefore, to store your work before the drum module turns off.

If the drum modules AutoPowerOff parameter is set to off, this setting will be retained when you import system data that was stored externally, regardless of the Auto Power-Off setting contained in that data. If, however, an Auto Power-Off time has been set using the AutoPowerOff parame- ter and system data is imported, the Auto Power-Off setting contained in that data will be applied.

NOTE Settings for the Auto Power-Off function do not represent exact times and actual power-off times may vary to a certain extent.

To turn the drum module back on after it has been turned off by the Auto Power-Off function, press the (Standby/On) switch once to return it to the Standby position, and then press it once again to the On position.

No. Name Description

PRE: 01 920K Wide For DTX920K

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 02 920K Normal Normal setting

PRE: 03 XP Wide For DTX950K/ 900K

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 04 XP Normal Normal setting

PRE: 05 SP Wide For DTXTREME III Special Drum Set

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 06 SP Normal Normal setting

PRE: 07 SP Narrow Controlled dynamic range delivers stable trigger detection. This setting is designed for producing a smoother, more uniform sound with reduced volume fluctuations.

PRE: 08 STD Wide For DTXTREME III Standard Drum Set

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 09 STD Normal Normal setting

PRE: 10 STD Narrow Controlled dynamic range delivers stable trigger detection. This setting is designed for producing a smoother, more uniform sound with reduced volume fluctuations.

PRE: 11 DT 10/20 Use for DT10/20 drum trigger systems applied to acoustic drums.

USR: 01 - 05 User Trigger Allows creation of custom trigger setups.

Settings

KP125W, KP125, KP100, KP65, KU100, XP120/100 (for snare), XP120/100 (for tom), XP80(for snare), XP80(for tom), XP70(for snare), XP70(for tom), TP120SD/100 (for snare), TP120SD/100 (for tom), TP70S (for snare), TP70S (for tom), TP70S(for hihat), TP70, TP65S (for snare), TP65S (for tom), TP65S (for hihat), TP65, PCY155, PCY135, PCY150S, PCY130SC, PCY130S/130, PCY100, PCY90, PCY65S/65, RHH135, RHH130, DT10/20 (for snare), DT10/ 20(for HiTom), DT10/20 (for LoTom), DT10/20 (for Kick), TRG Snare, TRG HiTom, TRG LoTom, TRG Kick

NOTICE

PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, re or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

Only use the voltage specied as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

Use the specied adaptor (page 155) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.

This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualied Yamaha service personnel.

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualied Yamaha service personnel.

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a re.

When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. It emits unusual smells or smoke. Some object has been dropped into the instrument. There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are

using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still owing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Use only the stand/rack specied for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

(7)-1 1/2

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel.

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the STANDBY position, electricity is still owing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Connections Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

NOTICE To avoid the possibility of damage to the product, data or other property, follow the notices below.

Handling and Maintenance Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the

instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car

during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disguration or damage to the internal components. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning uids, or chemical-

impregnated wiping cloths.

Saving data DRAM data (page 76) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to external USB storage device. To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices.

About the latest Firmware Version Yamaha may from time to time update rmware of the product without notice for improvement. We recommend that you check our web site for later releases and upgrade your rmware of the DTX900.

http://download.yamaha.com/

Note that the explanations in this Owners Manual apply to the version of rmware when this Owners Manual was produced. For details about functions added in later releases, refer to the above website.

About the pads This Owners Manual described the model names of the drum pads which can be connected to the DTX900. Note that these were the latest models at the time this Owners Manual was produced. For details about more recently released models, refer to the following website.

http://www.yamaha.com/

(7)-2 2/2

Introduction Thank you for purchasing the YAMAHA DTX900.

The new DTX900 incorporates the highly acclaimed AWM2 tone generator and a sophisticated music sequencer.

In addition to the functions of its predecessor, DTX900 provides full support of the current Yamaha trigger products and also sports a USB terminal for MIDI connections (in addition to conventional MIDI

connectors) and has a built-in sampling feature that allows you to create your own Drum Voices. The instrument is ideal for virtually any application live performance, rhythm training, music creation and

studio recording. To get the most out of your DTX900, please read this manual carefully. After reading through the manual, make sure to store it in a safe place so that you can refer back to it again as needed.

Included Accessories

AC Power Adaptor* * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Module stand Module stand fastening screws (4; included) Owners Manual (this document) Data List DVD-ROM* (containing software)

* For details on the bundled DVD-ROM, see page 159.

Information

About copyrights Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited

except for your personal use. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which

it has license to use others copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style les, MIDI les, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of per- sonal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DONT MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

About functions/data bundled with the instrument This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with

the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

DTX900 : T-1240067 DTX900M : T-1250147

About this manual The contents of this Owners Manual and the copyrights thereof are under exclusive ownership by Yamaha Corporation. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument. The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

6 DTX900 Owners Manual

Main Features

Designed primarily for professional drummers, the DTX900 has a Drum Trigger feature, a 64-note polyphonic Tone Gener- ator, a built-in Sampling feature that lets you expand the available sounds, a high-performance Metronome (Click) feature and a built-in music sequencer that enables recording and playback of rhythm or accompaniment patterns, and even lets you create an entire Song. The DTX900 is an exceptionally versatile instrument that can be used in a variety of situations such as live performance, personal practice, and much more.

Drum Trigger The DTX900 drum trigger module is compatible with the

new pads (XP series.) Built into the unit are 15 Trigger Input jacks and a Hi-Hat

Controller jack. The instrument also features jacks that are compatible with

two-zone or three-zone pads (pads that transmit different signals depending on the area that is hit). Moreover, the snare drum jack is compatible with pad-controller-equipped pads. This lets you adjust the virtual snares and the tun- ingjust as you would with a snare drum. All in all, the DTX900 offers virtually the same playability, expressive- ness and functionality that you get in an acoustic drum kit.

By combining the Stack function, which lets you play mul- tiple voices (MIDI notes) at the same time, along with the Alternate function, which lets you play a sequence of the Stack program, you can create complex performances and play passages in realtime that would otherwise be impossi- ble on conventional acoustic drums.

Tone Generator The DTX900 is equipped with a high-quality, 16-bit AWM2

(PCM) tone generator with 64-voice polyphony that pro- duces dynamic voices or exceptional realism.

The instrument has a wide variety of Voices including authentic acoustic drums, unique electronic percussion, sound effects, and normal keyboard Voices. It can also be used as a high-quality drum tone generator along with vari- ous MIDI devices, even without using the Drum Pads.

Also included in the unit are 50 preset Drum Kits which contain natural, authentic sounding acoustic Drum Kits, and cover a wide range of music genres, such as rock, funk, jazz, reggae, Latin, etc. Moreover, User kit memory is avail- able for storing 50 sets. With this, you can set up your own original Drum Kits using the various Drum Voices.

The Sampling feature lets you record the audio signal to the DTX900 or load the audio le from the USB storage device to create your original Voice. The created Voice can be assigned to the Drum Kit as desired.

The instrument is equipped with a Variation Effect which can be used for each Drum Kit as well as Reverb, Chorus and Master Effects which can be used for the entire DTX900. In addition, an Insertion Effect for the sound input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack is provided, allowing you to adjust the quality of AUX IN/SAMPLING IN sound or record an audio signal to which the Insertion Effect is applied to the DTX900 in the Sampling mode.

Music Sequencer (Song) The built-in sequencer contains a wide variety of Preset

Songs. The Mute function lets you turn on/off the rhythm (drum & percussion sound) part, bass part and other accom- paniment part individually, or turn each track on/off.

The DTX900 also allows you to record your performance in real time and allows you to play along with the Song data while muting the original drum part.

Four Pad Songs can be individually controlled and simulta- neously played by trigger input from the pads.

High-performance Metronome (Click) The DTX900 provides a comprehensive, multi-function

metronome, allowing various click settings such as voice and tuning for each beat timing. Furthermore, you can change the accent timing and use the Measure Break feature that alternates click playback between on and off (mute) repeatedly.

The Groove Check Function checks and provides instant feedback on your rhythmic skillsa powerful tool for improving your technique. It includes a Rhythm Gate func- tion that produces sounds only if your timing is accurate.

Chain Programming a Chain sequence lets you call up the Drum

Kit number, Song number and Click settings (tempo and beat) in order during your live performance. Each step in the programmed Chain can be called up by hitting the pad.

Interfaces The USB terminal and MIDI connectors on the rear panel

let you connect a computer and other MIDI devices to the DTX900. These enable fast, efcient and comprehensive music-creation capabilities, letting you play sounds from an external tone generator as well as record your own perfor- mance using the included Cubase AI.

Each of the six INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT jacks can sepa- rately output any specied Drum Voice such as Snare and Tom to send each instrument signal to an external mixer for live performance or recording session. In addition, a Digital Output (S/PDIF) terminal lets you transfer the DTX900 ste- reo sounds to other devices with no noise and full digital quality.

The instrument has a built-in AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack which lets you connect a CD player to the DTX900allow- ing you to play the instrument along with CD playback as well as use the powerful Sampling feature.

DTX900 Owners Manual 7

Contents

Introduction .............................................................6 Included Accessories ..............................................6 Main Features .........................................................7

Panel Controls..................................................... 10

Basic Operation................................................... 13

Setting Up ............................................................ 16 Connecting the Pads.............................................16 Setting Up the Power Supply ................................18 Turning the Power On...........................................18 Connecting to Speakers or Headphones..............19 Connecting to External Audio Equipment .............19 Connecting External MIDI Devices .......................20 Connecting a USB Storage Device.......................21 Selecting the Trigger Setup ..................................22 Connecting a Computer ........................................24 Setting up Cubase Remote Control ......................25 Creating a Song by Using a Computer .................26 Adjusting the Sound and Display Contrast ...........27

Quick Guide 28

How to Play the Drum Pads ............................... 28

Playing the DTX900............................................. 30 Hitting the Pads.....................................................30 Selecting a Drum Kit .............................................30 Adjusting the Volume by Using the Sliders ...........31

Playing Along With the Click ............................. 32 Start the Click (Metronome) ..................................32 Changing the Tempo and Time Signature (Beat) of the Click .................................................33

Tap Tempo ........................................................... 34

Playing Along With a Song ................................ 35 Song Playback ......................................................35 Adjusting the Volume of the Song Accompaniment ....................................................38 Changing the Tempo of the Song.........................38 Song Part Mute Setting.........................................39

Creating a Drum Kit ............................................ 40

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song.. 43 Recording System.................................................43 Recording Methods...............................................43 Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song .....44 Recording Additional Notes to an Already-recorded Track (Overdub) .......................46 Recording Along With the Preset Song ................46 Re-recording a Track After Clearing .....................48 Assigning a Name to a User Song........................49

Using the Groove Check Function.....................50 Setting the Check Timing ..................................... 50 Trying Out Groove Check..................................... 51 Trying Out Rhythm Gate....................................... 52

Saving the Created Data to a USB Storage Device ...................................................................54

File/Folder Selection............................................. 54 Saving the Created Data to a USB Storage Device................................................................... 55 Loading a File Saved to a USB Storage Device... 56

Reference 57

Basic Structure of the DTX900 ...........................57 The Functional Blocks .......................................... 57 Pads (Trigger Input Sources) and Trigger Signals ..................................................... 58 Tone Generator Block (Drum Kits and Drum Voices)........................................................ 62 Sampling............................................................... 65 Song ..................................................................... 67 Effects................................................................... 68 Internal Memory and File Management................ 76

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT] ................................78 Basic Procedure in the Drum Kit Mode ................ 78 Selecting a Drum Kit [F1] PLAY ........................... 79 Setting Drum Voice Parameters [F2] VOICE........ 79 Programming the Stack/Alternate [F3] STK/ALT.. 86 Effect Settings [F4] EFFECT ................................ 89 Pad Settings [F5] PAD.......................................... 92 Other Settings [F6] OTHER.................................. 95

Song Mode [SONG] .............................................98 Song Play [F1] PLAY............................................ 98 Song Recording [F1] PLAY [REC] ................... 98 Song Jobs [F2] JOB ............................................. 98

Click Mode [CLICK] ...........................................104 Basic Procedure in the Click Mode..................... 104 Basic Settings of the Click Sound [F1] PLAY ..... 105 Click Voice Settings [F2] VOICE ........................ 106 Tap Tempo Function [F3] TAP ........................... 106 Groove Check Function [F4] GROOVE.............. 106 Click Sound Settings [F5] OTHER...................... 107

Trigger Mode [TRIGGER] ..................................108 Basic Procedure in the Trigger Mode ................. 108 Selecting the Trigger Setup [F1] SELECT.......... 109 Selecting the Pad Type [F2] TYPE..................... 109 Trigger Sensitivity Settings [F3] SENS............... 109 Setting the Rejection [F4] REJECT .................... 110 Other Settings [F5] OTHER................................ 111

8 DTX900 Owners Manual

Contents

File Mode [FILE] .................................................112 Terminology in the File Mode ............................. 112 File Types Compatible With the DTX900 ........... 113 Saving a File [F1] SAVE..................................... 114 Loading a File [F2] LOAD................................... 116 Changing the Name of a File or Directory [F3] RENAME ..................................................... 121 Deleting a File or Directory [F4] DELETE........... 122 Formatting USB Storage Media [F5] FORMAT .. 123

Utility Mode [UTILITY]........................................124 Basic Procedure in the Utility Mode.................... 124 General Settings [F1] GENERAL ....................... 124 Pad Settings [F2] PAD........................................ 126 Effect Settings [F3] EFFECT .............................. 127 External Audio Settings [F4] AUXIN................... 128 MIDI Settings [F5] MIDI ...................................... 130 Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings [F6] FACTSET......................... 131

Chain Mode [CHAIN] ..........................................132 Using a Programmed Chain [F1] SELECT......... 132 Programming a Chain [F2] EDIT ........................ 133 Naming the Created Chain [F3] NAME .............. 134

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING] ............................135 Sampling Setup .................................................. 135 Sampling Operation and User Voice Assignment [F1] SELECT/[F2] SETTING............................... 136 Trimming a User Voice [F3] TRIM...................... 139 Sampling Jobs [F4] JOB..................................... 142

Appendix 147

Optional DIMM Installation................................147

Troubleshooting.................................................150

Display Messages ..............................................153

DTX900 & DTX900M Specifications..................155

Index....................................................................156

About the Accessory Disk.................................159

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT................159

DTX900 Owners Manual 9

Panel Controls

Front Panel

q LCD display The large LCD Display shows information and data needed to operate the DTX900.

w LED display The LED display indicates the current Drum Kit or tempo value in three digits.

e [DRUM KIT] button Pressing this button enters the Drum Kit mode, allowing you to select the desired Drum Kit (pages 30 and 78).

r [CLICK] button Pressing this button enters the Click mode, allowing you to per- form the Click (Metronome) setup (pages 32 and 104).

t [FILE] button Pressing this button enters the File mode, allowing you to man- age data created in each of the modes (pages 54 and 112).

y [CHAIN] button Pressing this button enters the Chain mode, allowing you to program a Chain, which is a series of Drum Kits and Songs arranged in the order you want (page 132).

u [SONG] button Pressing this button enters the Song mode, allowing you to play an existing Song or record your drum performance (pages 35 and 98).

i [TRIGGER] button Pressing this button enters the Trigger mode, allowing you to select or program a Trigger Setup (pages 22 and 108).

o [UTILITY] button Pressing this button enters the Utility mode, allowing you to set parameters related to the entire system of the DTX900 (page 124).

!0 [SAMPLING] button Pressing this button enters the Sampling mode, allowing you to record the external audio signal then create User Voices (page 135).

888w

e u

r i

t o

y !0

!1

!2

!3

!6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @7 @8

#0 #1

@6

@9

!4

q

!5

NOTE Before use, be sure to remove the transparent lm applied to the LCD

display to protect it during transportation.

NOTE Before use, be sure to remove the transparent lm applied to the LED

display to protect it during transportation.

10 DTX900 Owners Manual

Panel Controls

!1 TRIGGER INDICATOR This lamp indicates whether or not the DTX900 receives the trigger signal via the Trigger Input jacks. The lamp is turned on when receiving the trigger signal. This lamp is turned on also when pressing the Audition button (described below).

!2 Audition button You can use this button instead of the drum pad. Pressing this button is equivalent to receiving a signal from the currently selected trigger input source (page 58). When turning the power on, pressing this button is equivalent to striking the head of the snare pad (the pad connected to the SNARE jack).

!3 [F1] [F6] (Function) buttons These buttons located directly below the LCD display call up the corresponding functions indicated in the display. In the dis- play hierarchy, these functions [F] rank just below the modes.

!4 [SF1] [SF6] (Sub-Function) buttons These buttons located directly below the LCD display call up the corresponding sub functions indicated in the display. In the display hierarchy, these sub functions [SF] rank just below the functions [F].

!5 Transport buttons (page 35) These buttons control recording and playback of the Song sequence data.

p (Top) button Instantly returns to the beginning of the current Song (i.e., the rst beat of the rst measure).

r (Reverse) button Press briey to move back one measure at a time, or hold to continuously rewind.

f (Forward) button Press briey to move forward one measure at a time, or hold to continuously fast-forward.

REC (Record) button Press this to enable Song recording. (The indicator lights.)

>/ (Play/Stop) button Press to start/stop recording or playback. Pressing this but- ton during playback stops playback at the current point in the Song then pressing this again starts playback from that point. During recording and playback, the indicator lights.

CLICK ON/OFF button Press this button to start/stop the metronome (click sound).

!6 MASTER slider (page 31) Adjusts the output volume of the stereo mix from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.

!7 PHONES slider (page 31) Adjusts the output volume of the stereo-mixed sounds for the PHONES jack. This is independent from the MASTER slider setting.

!8 CLICK slider (page 31) Adjusts the output volume of the click sound.

!9 ACCOMP slider (page 31) Adjusts the output volume of the accompaniment parts (those other than MIDI channel 10) in the Song.

@0 KICK slider (page 31) Adjusts the volume of the bass drum.

@1 SNARE slider (page 31) Adjusts the volume of the snare drum.

@2 TOM slider (page 31) Adjusts the volume of the toms.

@3 CYMBAL slider (page 31) Adjusts the volume of the cymbals.

@4 HI-HAT slider (page 31) Adjusts the volume of the hi-hat cymbals.

@5 MISC slider (page 31) Adjusts the volume of miscellaneous rhythm or percussion sounds other than snare and bass drums, toms, hi-hats, and ride and crash cymbals.

@6 Data dial For editing the currently selected parameter. To increase the value, turn the dial right (clockwise); to decrease the value, turn the dial left (counter-clockwise). If a parameter with a wide value range is selected, you can change the value in broader strokes by quickly turning the dial.

@7 [DEC/NO] button (page 13) For decreasing the value of the currently selected parameter. Also use it to cancel a Job or a Store operation.

@8 [INC/YES] button (page 13) For increasing the value of the currently selected parameter. Also use it to actually execute a Job or a Store operation.

@9 Cursor buttons (page 13) The cursor buttons move the cursor around the LCD display screen, highlighting and selecting the various parameters.

#0 [EXIT] button Press this button to cancel an operation when a conrmation message is shown in the LCD. This button can be used also when the drum sound continues inadvertently or unexpectedly and you want to stop it.

#1 [ENTER/STORE] button As with the ENTER button, press this to enter the display of the selected Song Job/Sampling Job, for example. As with the STORE button, press this to store the edited data in the Drum Kit mode, Click mode, Trigger mode, Utility mode, and Chain mode. You can also use this button when executing the Song Job or Sampling Job.

DTX900 Owners Manual 11

Panel Controls

Rear Panel

q F (Standby/On) switch Press to turn the power ON or OFF.

w DC IN terminal Connect the AC power adaptor to this terminal.

e Cable clip Wrap the DC output cable of the adaptor around the cable clip to prevent accidental unplugging of the cable during operation.

r LCD Contrast Control Use this control to set the LCD display for optimum legibility.

t GAIN knob For adjusting the input gain of the audio at the AUX IN/SAM- PLING IN jack. Depending on the connected device (micro- phone, CD player, etc.), you may need to adjust this for optimum level. Increase the gain by rotating the knob clock- wise, and decrease it by rotating the knob counter-clockwise.

y AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack External audio signals can be input via this phone jack (stan- dard stereo phone plug). This is convenient for playing along with music from a CD player or other device. In the Sampling mode, this jack is used for capturing audio data as User Voices.

u OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks External audio signals can be input via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). Various devices such as microphone, gui- tar, bass, CD player, can be connected to these jacks. For ste- reo signals (such as from audio equipment), use both jacks. For mono signals (such as from a microphone or guitar), use only the L jack.

i PHONES jack For connection to a pair of stereo headphones.

o INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 6 jacks Line level audio signals are output from this instrument via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). These outputs are independent of the main output (at the L/MONO and R jacks), and can be freely assigned to any Drum Voice. This lets you route specic sounds for processing with a favorite outboard effect unit.

!0 DIGITAL OUT connector This is for connecting to a coaxial digital input (S/P DIF) on an external audio device. This jack digitally outputs stereo audio signals identical to those from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks, but is not affected by the !6 MASTER volume slider set- ting (the digital jack always outputs audio signals at the maxi- mum volume level).

!1 MIDI IN/OUT connectors These jacks are for the transfer of MIDI data to and from exter- nal MIDI devices.

!2 USB terminals This instrument is equipped with two types of USB terminals on the rear panel USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE. The USB TO HOST terminal is used to connect this instrument to the computer via the USB cable. The USB connection between the instrument and the computer can only be used for transfer of MIDI data. No audio data can be transferred via USB. The USB TO DEVICE terminal is used to connect this instrument to a USB storage device (ash memory, hard disk drive, etc.) via the USB cable. This lets you save the data created on this instrument to an external USB storage device as well as load data from the device to the instrument. Save/Load operations can be performed in the File mode.

!3 HI-HAT CONTROL jack This jack is used to connect a hi-hat controller. Depending on the setting on the Drum Kit mode (page 78), you can transmit the MIDI messages such as Control Change by using the Hi- Hat Controller.

!4 Trigger Input jacks (q SNARE o HI-HAT) These jacks, which are compatible with stereo pads (two-zone and three-zone pads) as well as mono pads, receive the Trigger Signal transmitted from the drum pads. Furthermore, the q SNARE t TOM4 jacks are also compatible with the Pad Controller (page 59).

!5 Trigger Input jack (!0/!1 KICK) This jack is designed to accept two separate trigger signals from two mono (single) pad by using a Y-shaped cable (stereo phone plug for this jack and two mono plugs for the two pads). When using the KP125W/KP65 equipped with the PAD INPUT jack, the Trigger Signals of another pad connected to the PAD INPUT jack and KP itself can be transferred via a single stereo cable (no need for a Y-shaped cable) to the DTX900. In this case, the stereo cable is plugged into the OUTPUT jack of a pad and this Trigger Input jack.

!6 Trigger Input jacks (!2 !5) These jacks, which are compatible with stereo pads (two-zone and three-zone pads) as well as mono pads, receive the Trigger Signal transmitted from the drum pads.

wq

e

t y u ir

o !0 !1 !2

!5 !3 !6 !4

12 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Operation

Use these four buttons to navigate through the display, moving the cursor around the various selectable items and parameters in the screen. When selected, the relevant item is highlighted (the cursor appears as a dark block with inverse characters). You can change the value of the item (parameter) at which the cursor is located by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the value, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise) decreases it. For parameters with large value ranges, you can increase the value by 10 by simultaneously holding down the [INC/YES] button and pressing the [DEC/NO] button. To decrease by 10, do the opposite; simultaneously hold down the [DEC/NO] button and press the [INC/YES] button.

Each mode described above contains various displays, with various functions and parameters. To navigate your way through these displays and select a desired function, use the [F1] [F6] buttons and the [SF1] [SF6] buttons. When you select a mode, the available displays or menus appear directly above the buttons at the bottom of the display (as shown below). Depending on the currently selected mode, up to six func- tions are available and can be called up with the [F1] [F6] buttons. Keep in mind that the available functions differ depending on the selected mode. Depending on the currently selected mode, up to six func- tions (sub-functions) are also available and can be called up with the [SF1] [SF6] buttons. Keep in mind that the avail- able functions differ depending on the selected mode. (Some displays may not have any sub-functions for these buttons.)

Moving the Cursor

Changing or Editing Parameter Values

IncreaseDecrease

Increase by 1

Decrease by 1

Functions and Sub-Functions

These functions can be selected via the corresponding button ([F1] [F6]).

These functions can be selected via the corresponding button ([SF1] [SF6]).

DTX900 Owners Manual 13

Basic Operation

In order to make operation of the DTX900 as comprehen- sive and as smooth as possible, all functions and operations have been grouped in modes. To enter the desired mode, press the corresponding Mode button.

The function of each mode is as follows:

You can adjust or set various parameters by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button and [DEC/NO] button in each mode. When changing the value of the parameter in these modes, the [E] (Edit Indicator) will appear on the top left corner of the LCD display. This indicates that the current program (Drum Kit, etc.) has been modied but not yet stored. If you wish to store the status or sound obtained by editing, be sure to store the current program to internal User memory by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button before selecting another program.

For parameters having large value ranges, you can also enter the value directly, using the buttons below the LCD display as a numeric keypad. When the cursor is located on such a parameter, the [NUM] icon appears at the lower right corner of the LCD display. When the [SF6] NUM but- ton is pressed in this status, each digit (1 9, 0) is assigned to the [SF1] [SF5] and [F1] [F5] buttons as shown below, allowing you to input a number directly by using these buttons. After completing the number input, press the [ENTER/ STORE] button to actually enter the number. Note that the cursor highlight can be moved to the currently edited number by pressing the [F6] CURSOR button, and then moved from digit to digit by using the Cursor [N] and [M] buttons. This method is useful when you want to directly change only one specic digit. The cursor disap- pears when pressing the [F6] button again.

Modes

Mode Function Page

Drum Kit Selecting/editing a Drum Kit. 78

Click Setting the Click (Metronome) related parameters and performing the Groove Check function.

104

File Managing les and directories (folders). 112

Chain Programming a Chain sequence. 132

Song Selecting/recording a Song. 98

Trigger Selecting/editing a Trigger Setup. 108

Utility Setting the system related parameters. 124

Sampling Recording audio signals to create a User Voice.

135

Edit Indicator

If the Edit Indicator appears...

Inputting a Number Directly

Numeric Keypad

14 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Operation

As shown below, you can set the name by repeating the two operations moving the cursor to the desired location by using the Cursor buttons and then selecting a character by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button, and [DEC/NO] but- ton.

Using the character list If you nd it difcult to select the desired characters with the above method, you may want to use the following method selecting the characters directly from a list.

Inputting Characters (Naming, etc.)

Move the cursor to the desired location in the name

Select a character at the cursor location

When the cursor is located at the Name, this [LIST] icon appears and you can call up the Character List display by holding the [SF6] button. Release the [SF6] button to return back to the original display.

Perform the operations below while holding the [SF6] button.

Move the cursor to the desired location.

Select a character for the cursor location in the name.

DTX900 Owners Manual 15

Setting Up

Connecting the Pads Referring to the illustration below, connect the output cable from each pad to each Trigger Input jack located on the rear panel of the DTX900. All Trigger Input jacks are conveniently labeled (1 SNARE, etc.), so make sure each pad is connected to its corresponding Trigger Input jack.

DTX900K

IMPORTANT

Youll need to change the Trigger Settings of the DTX900 according to the type of drum set you are using (Stan- dard Set/Special Set/Acoustic Drums, etc.). If the setting is not appropriate, problems may occursuch as improper sound, or inappropriate volume balance among the pads. Refer to the Selecting the Trigger Setup section on page 22 on how to select the appropriate setup.

To prevent electric shock and damage to the devices, make sure the power is switched OFF on the DTX900 and all related devices before making any connections to the DTX900s input and output jacks.

WARNING

PCY135

DTX900 PCY155

PCY135

KP125W XP120SD

RHH135

XP100T XP100T

XP100T

Attaching the module stand Attach the included module stand to the DTX900 using the module stand fastening screws. * Be sure to use the included screws.

to 1SNARE

to JKICK/K

to 2TOM1 to 3TOM2

to 4TOM3

to HI-HAT CONTROL

to 9HI-HAT

to 7CRASH

to 6RIDE

DTX900

Module stand (included)

Module stand fastening screws x 4 (included)

* First, connect the RHH135s [PAD] output jack to the 9HI- HAT jack on the DTX900, then connect the RHH135s [HI-HAT CONTROL] output jack to the HI-HAT CON- TROL jack on the DTX900.

* Foot pedal is not included in the Standard Set.

NOTE The pad models described in the illustrations were

included in the Standard Set/Special Set at the moment this Owners Manual was produced. Keep in mind that the model names of your Standard Set or Special Set may be different from the ones illustrated here. For details about the latest information on Yamaha drum pads, refer to the following website.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/drums/ed/

to 8CRASH2

16 DTX900 Owners Manual

Setting Up

DTX950K

Setting up with Acoustic Drums The DTX900 can be played from an acoustic drum kit if the kit is tted with an optional set of drum triggers (such as Yamaha DT20 Drum Triggers) and the triggers are properly connected to the input jacks of the DTX900.

PCY135

PCY135

DTX900

PCY155

KP125W

XP120SD

RHH135

XP100T XP100T

XP120T

XP120T

Attaching the module stand Attach the included module stand to the DTX900 using the module stand fastening screws. * Be sure to use the included screws.

DTX900

Module stand (included)

Module stand fastening screws x 4 (included)

to 1SNARE to JKICK/K

* Foot pedal is not included in the Special Set.

to 9HI-HAT

to HI-HAT CONTROL

to 7CRASH1

to 2TOM1 to 3TOM2

to 5TOM4

to 4TOM3

to 6RIDE

to 8CRASH2

* First, connect the RHH135s [PAD] output jack to the 9HI- HAT jack on the DTX900, then connect the RHH135s [HI-HAT CONTROL] output jack to the HI-HAT CONTROL jack on the DTX900.

DTX900 Owners Manual 17

Setting Up

Setting Up the Power Supply

1 Make sure that the F (Standby/On) switch of the instrument is set to standby ( ).

2 Connect the DC plug of the included AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack on the rear panel. To prevent the cord from being unplugged accidentally, wrap the cord around the cable clip and secure it.

3 Connect the other end of the power cord to an AC outlet.

Turning the Power On After youve made all necessary connections (trigger, audio, MIDI), turn down all volume controls of the DTX900 and other audio equipment. Turn the power on ( ) by pressing the F (Standby/On)

switch on the rear panel of the DTX900, then turn on the

power of the ampliers.

Connecting a mixer or other MIDI devices

Make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to the minimum. Then turn on the every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (controllers), MIDI slaves (receivers), then audio equipment (mixers, ampli- ers, speakers, etc.).

Make sure that the power adaptors cord is not bent at an extreme angle when wrapping the cord around the clip. Doing this can dam- age or sever the cord and create a re hazard.

Use only the included power adaptor or an equivalent recom- mended by Yamaha. The use of any other adaptors may cause irregular operation or damage to the device.

Only use the voltage specied as correct for the DTX900.

Even when the instrument is turned off, electricity is still owing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the DTX900 for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adap- tor from the wall AC outlet.

CAUTION

WARNING

NOTE When powering down the setup, rst turn down the volume for each audio

devices, then switch off each device in the reverse order (rst audio equip- ment, then MIDI).

888

1 DTX900 (transmitting device) 2 MIDI slave

3 External audio equipment (mixer amplier)

18 DTX900 Owners Manual

Setting Up

Connecting to Speakers or Headphones

Since the DTX900 has no built-in speakers, youll need an external audio system or a set of stereo headphones to properly monitor it.

OUTPUT L/MONO, R jacks (standard mono phone)

These jacks allow you to connect the DTX900 to an exter- nal amplier/speaker system and produce full, amplied sound.

Use the DTX900s OUTPUT L/MONO jack when connecting to a device with a mono input.

PHONES jack (standard stereo phone jack)

The overall headphone level is adjusted by the PHONES slider.

Connecting to External Audio Equipment

When recording your performance on a DTX900 Drum Kit or sending its sounds to a mixer, connect your equipment as follows:

The OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) and INDIVIDUAL OUT- PUT (1 to 6) jacks produce line level audio signals regard- less of whether headphones are connected or not. These jacks are mono phone type. To make audio connections via these jacks, use cables with a mono phone plug for the DTX900 and an appropriate plug for the other device.

Use both OUTPUT jacks (L/MONO and R) for stereo out- put. If the other device has a mono input, use the L/MONO jack only.

The DIGITAL OUTPUT connector can be connected to a coaxial digital input (S/P DIF) on an external audio device. This connector digitally outputs stereo audio signals identi- cal to those from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.

External audio signals input to AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack can be monitored together with the DTX900 sounds via headphones connected to the PHONES jack, and can be recorded to create additional User Voices. If necessary, you can use the [GAIN] knob on the rear panel to adjust the gain of the input signal.

Whenever making connections, make sure that the plug on the cable being used corresponds to the type of jack on the device.

Do not use the DTX900 at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. Doing so may cause hearing loss.

HeadphonesMonitor system for the DTX series MS100DR, MS50DR, etc.

OUTPUT L/MONO, R PHONES

NOTICE

CAUTION

NOTE Connect a set of headphones to the PHONES jack for monitoring the ste-

reo output (identical to that of the OUTPUT jacks). The sounds output from the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT jacks cannot be heard from the headphones connected to the PHONES jack.

Depending on the connected equipment, you may need to change the parameter settings in the Utility mode. For details, see page 128.

INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL OUT

DIGITAL IN

AUX OUT LINE OUT

AUX IN

O1V96

SOLO SOLO

ON ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ON

SOLO

ONON

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

PEAK SIGNAL

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SELSEL

ST IN

ENTER

EQUALIZER

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

Q

FREQUENCY

GAIN

STEREO

SELECTED CHANNEL

PAN DEC INC

SOLO CLEARRECALLSTORE

SCENE MEMORY

PHONESMONITOR OUT

MONITOR 2TR IN

CH15/16 2TR IN

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL 0 100 10+4 -26GAIN

+4 -26GAIN

+4 -26GAIN

GAIN +4 -26GAIN

20dB

-16 -60 GAIN

20dB

-16 -60 GAIN

20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60 GAIN

-16 -60

PAD

FADER MODE

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUX 1

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8

AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4

AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5

HOME (METER)

DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT VIEW

PATCH

UTILITYMIDISCENE DIO/SETUP

/ INSERT/ DELAY

PAN/ ROUTING

PAIR/ GROUP

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B 16

1513 12111098764321 5

14

INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O

L

R

IN OUT 2TR

-10dBV (UNBAL)

PHANTOM +48V

CH9-12CH5-8CH1-4

INPUT (BAL)

INSERT

OUT IN (UNBAL)

ST IN 1 ST IN 2

USER DEFINED KEYS

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

55 5

+10

5

1010

10

1515

15

2020

20

303030

30

4040

40

5050

50

6060 7070

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

00

5

10

15

20

0

0

5

+10

5

10

1530

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

15

0

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

3015

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

3015

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

3015

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

3015

20

30

40

40

50

50

60 70

3015

20

30

40

40

20

30

40

20

30

40

20

30

40

50

50505050

20

30

40

50

20

30

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

40

50

60 70

3015

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

5

10

15

20

0

30

5

10

15

20

0

30

5

10

15

20

0

30

5

10

15

20

0

30

5

10

15

20

0

303030

5

10

15

20

0

5

10

15

20

0

5

10

15

20

0

5

+10

5

10

0

15

5

+10

5

10

0

15

5

+10

5

10

0

15

5

+10

5

10

0

15

20

30

40

50

15 15

20

30

40

50

15

5

+10

5

10

0

5

+10

5

10

0

5

+10

5

10

0

5

+10

5

10

0

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

13 14 15 16

32313029282726252423222120191817 STEREO

13 14 15 16

OVER

0

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

888

CD player

MD player

DTX900

DTX900 Owners Manual 19

Setting Up

Connecting External MIDI Devices Using a standard MIDI cable (available separately), you can connect an external MIDI device, and control it from the DTX900. This connection lets you sound an external MIDI tone generator (synthesizer, tone generator module, etc.) by playing the DTX900 or playing back a Song on the DTX900. Also, an external sequencer can be used to drive the DTX900s Tone Gen- erator. Furthermore, the use of MIDI functions allows for an even greater range of performance and recording possibilities with the DTX900.

Controlling an external tone generator or synthesizer Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector on the DTX900 with the MIDI IN connector on the external MIDI device.

Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard or synthesizer Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI IN connector on the DTX900 with the MIDI OUT connector on the external MIDI device.

NOTE Any one of the DTX900 interfaces (MIDI connectors or the USB terminal) can be used for MIDI data transmission/

reception. However, they cannot be used at the same time. Select which connector is used for MIDI data transfer in the Utility mode with the following operation: [UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF3] OTHER MIDI IN/OUT

888

DTX900

MIDI device

MIDI IN connectorMIDI OUT connector MIDI cable

888

DTX900

MIDI device

MIDI OUT connectorMIDI IN connector MIDI cable

Synchronizing with an external MIDI instrument (Master and Slave) The Songs of this instrument can be synchronized to the playback of an external MIDI sequencer, To do this, one device must be set to internal clock operation and the other (as well as all other devices to be controlled) to external clock. The device set to internal clock serves as a reference for all connected devices, and is referred to as the master instrument. The connected devices set to external clock are referred to as slaves. When recording playback data of an external MIDI sequencer to a Song of the DTX900 in the above connection example, make sure to set the MIDI synchronization param- eter to follow external clock with the following operation in the Utility mode.

20 DTX900 Owners Manual

Setting Up

Connecting a USB Storage Device You can connect a USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal on the rear panel of this instrument.

This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE ter- minal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the impor- tant precautions below.

Compatible USB devices USB storage devices (ash memory, hard disk drive, etc.)

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer- cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur- chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha dis- tributor (see list at end of the Owners Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/drums/ed/

Connecting a USB device When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.

Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1.

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data youve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.

Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 123).

To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing a USB storage device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Load and Delete operations).

888

USB ash memory or

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Connecting to a USB storage device (hard disk drive, etc.)

USB storage device

DTX900

Precautions When Using the USB TO DEVICE Terminal

NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the

owners manual of the USB device.

NOTE Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be

used.

NOTE When connecting a USB cable, use it less than 3 meters.

Using USB Storage Devices

NOTE Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they

cannot be used for saving data.

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data.

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument freezing or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

NOTICE

NOTICE

DTX900 Owners Manual 21

Setting Up

Selecting the Trigger Setup The Trigger Setup contains various settings related to Trigger Input Signals received from pads or drum triggers (Yamaha DT20, etc.) that are connected to the Trigger Input jacks. These settings let you optimize the DTX900 for best operation and response to these signals. Select an appropriate Trigger Setup for your Drum Kit from the pre-programmed Trigger Setups in the DTX900. Use the operation described below to select the Trigger Setup you want to use.

1 Press the [TRIGGER] button to enter the Trigger mode. The Trigger selection display appears.

1 Trigger Setup number Indicates the current Trigger Setup number.

B Trigger Input Level Indicator As soon as you strike the pad, the Trigger Input Level is shown as a bar graph above the number corresponding to the Trigger Input jack connected to the pad youve hit.

C [SF6] Input Lock Pressing this button turns the Input Lock (L indicator at the right corner of the display) on or off. Normally, the Trigger Input jack or Trigger Input Source to be edited can be determined by hitting the corresponding pad. If you want to maintain it even if you hit one of the pads, press this button to turn the Input Lock (L indi- cator) on.

2 Select the desired Trigger Setup number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button or [DEC/NO] button. For information about each Trigger Setup, refer to the Trigger Setup List on page 23.

If you want a particular Trigger Setup (i.e., the one youve selected above) to be called up every time the power of the DTX900 is turned on, follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode.

2 Press the [F1] GENERAL button followed by the [SF4] START UP button to call up the Start Up display.

1 TriggerNo (Trigger Setup number) Indicates the Trigger Setup number called up when the power of the DTX900 is turned on.

3 Move the cursor to the Trigger Setup num- ber, then select the desired number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] button or [DEC/NO] button. For information about each Trigger Setup, refer to the Trigger Setup List on page 23.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store the setting.

Selecting the Trigger Setup

Settings PRE: 01 PRE: 09, USR: 01 USR: 05

21

3

Setting a Default Trigger Setup to be Called Up When the Power is Turned On

NOTE You can create your original Trigger Setup by editing various parame-

ters. For details, see page 108.

For Factory Set operations that take longer to process, a message Please keep power on appears during processing. While such a message is shown (while data is being written to Flash ROM), never attempt to turn off the power. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may cause the instrument to not start up properly, even when turning the power on next time.

1

NOTICE

22 DTX900 Owners Manual

Setting Up

Trigger Setup List

* In the default setting, PRE: 01 XP Wide for DTX950K/900K is selected.

The original factory settings of this instruments User Memory (page 76) can be restored as follows. For each of all modes, you can set whether or not User Memory data is initialized.

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode.

2 Press the [F6] FACTSET button to call up the Factory Set display.

1 Checkbox If you enter a checkmark for a mode name in the display (in step 3 below), executing the Factory Set will reset the User Memory data or settings of the corresponding mode to the initial factory settings. For those modes without checkmarks, the User Memory data or settings will be maintained even if Factory Set is executed.

3 Move the cursor to the checkbox of the desired mode then enter or remove the checkmark by using the data dial, [INC/ YES] button or [DEC/NO] button.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The display prompts you for conrmation. Press the [DEC/NO] button or [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

5 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Factory Set operation. After the Factory Set has been completed, a Com- pleted message appears and operation returns to the original display.

No. Name Description

PRE: 01 XP Wide For DTX950K/ 900K

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 02 XP Normal Normal setting

PRE: 03 SP Wide For DTXTREME III Special Drum Set

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 04 SP Normal Normal setting

PRE: 05 SP Narrow Controlled dynamic range delivers stable trigger detection. This setting is designed for producing a smoother, more uniform sound with reduced volume uctuations.

PRE: 06 STD Wide For DTXTREME III Standard Drum Set

Wide dynamic range. This setting is designed for maximum expressive control, allowing performance subtleties over a wide dynamic range.

PRE: 07 STD Normal Normal setting

PRE: 08 STD Narrow Controlled dynamic range delivers stable trigger detection. This setting is designed for producing a smoother, more uniform sound with reduced volume uctuations.

PRE: 09 DT10/20 Use for DT10/20 drum trigger systems applied to acoustic drums. USR: 01 05 User Trigger Allows creation of custom trigger setups.

Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings

When the factory settings are restored, all the data you created in each mode will be erased. Make sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to a USB storage device before executing this procedure (page 114).

NOTICE

1

For Factory Set operations that take longer to process, a message Executing... or Please keep power on. appears during process- ing. While such a message is shown (while data is being written to Flash ROM), never attempt to turn off the power. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This means that this instrument may not be able to start up properly, even when turning the power on next time.

NOTICE

DTX900 Owners Manual 23

Setting Up

Connecting a Computer Although the DTX900 is exceptionally powerful and versatile all by itself, connecting it to a computer via USB cable provides even greater power and versatility. This feature lets you transfer MIDI data between the DTX900 and your com- puter. In this section youll learn how to make the connections.

1 Download the USB-MIDI driver from our website:

http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/usb_midi/

2 Install the downloaded USB-MIDI driver to the computer. For instructions on installing, refer to the online Instal- lation Guide included in the downloaded le package. When connecting the DTX900 to a computer in the Installation procedure, connect the USB cable to the USB TO HOST of the DTX900 and the USB terminal of the computer as shown below.

3 Make sure that the USB TO HOST terminal of the DTX900 is enabled. Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode, then press the [F5] MIDI button followed by the [SF3] OTHER button.

4 Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to USB by using the [DEC/NO] button, [INC/YES] button or data dial.

5 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store this setting.

Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and cor- rupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instru- ment freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.

NOTE Since the DTX900 has no built-in speakers, youll need an external audio

system or a set of stereo headphones to properly monitor it. For details, see page 19.

NOTE Information on system requirements is also available at the above

web site.

NOTE The USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior

notice. Make sure to check and download the latest version from the above site.

USB terminal

USB TO HOST terminal

USB cable

Rear panel of the DTX900

Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus- pended, sleep, standby).

Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com- puter to the USB TO HOST terminal.

Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.

Quit any open application software on the computer.

Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru- ment. (Data is transmitted only by playing pads or playing back a Song.)

While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

NOTICE

24 DTX900 Owners Manual

Setting Up

Setting up Cubase Remote Control Using this special feature, the DTX900 can operate as a remote controller for Cubase. For example, you can operate the Cubase transport, turn its metronome on or off, and control various other functions from the instruments front panel, signif- icantly increasing the efciency of your music production workow.

Computer settings When setting up Cubase remote control for the rst time, complete the following steps to properly congure your computer.

1 Download the latest version of the DTX900 Extension from the following web page. Save the compressed le in a convenient location and then expand it.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/drums/ed

2 Execute the expanded DTX900 Extension to carry out the required installation pro- cedure. For more details, refer to the owners manual included in the down- loaded package.

DTX900 settings In order to use the Cubase Remote function, the following steps must be performed on the DTX900.

1 Make sure that the USB TO HOST terminal of the DTX900 is enabled. Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode, then press the [F5] MIDI button followed by the [SF3] OTHER button. For details, see page 131.

2 Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to USB by using the [DEC/NO] button, [INC/YES] button or data dial.

3 Ensure that the DTX900 is connected to your computer in the correct manner, and then launch Cubase. For more details regarding connection, see page 24.

4 Simultaneously hold down the [CHAIN] button and press the [SAMPLING] button. The message Cubase Remote will be displayed to conrm that the function has been activated.

5 To deactivate Cubase Remote mode, again simultaneously hold down the [CHAIN] button and press the [SAMPLING] button.

Button Functions in Cubase Remote Mode

* You can assign any Cubase function to the button.

NOTE Ensure that the latest USB MIDI driver is installed on your computer

(see page 24). Information on system requirements is also provided on the above

web page. The DTX900 Extension may be revised and updated without prior

notice. Before installing, visit the above web page to conrm the latest related information and ensure that you have the most up-to-date ver- sion.

Button Operation

[p] Returns the transport to the start of the song (TOP).

[r] Rewinds the transport (REW).

[f] Fast forwards the transport (FF).

[REC] Starts recording.

[>/ ] Starts and stops playback.

[CLICK ON/OFF] Turns the click track on and off.

[ ] Turns Solo Defeat of the currently selected track on and off.

[F1] Quantize*

[F2] Undo*

[F3] Zoom In*

[F4] Zoom Out*

[F5] Zoom in the selected track*

[F6] Zoom out the selected track*

[SF1] Not assigned *

[SF2] Not assigned *

[SF3] Not assigned *

[SF4] Not assigned *

[SF5] Not assigned *

[SF6] Not assigned *

[-1/DEC], [+1/INC] Moves the project cursor by 1 bar.

[INC/YES] Decreases the program number of the currently selected VST instrument by 1.

[DEC/NO] Increases the program number of the currently selected VST instrument by 1.

[ ] Selects the previous track.

[ ] Selects the next track.

[ ] Selects the previous track.

[ ] Selects the next track.

[CHAIN]+[SAMPLING] Turns the Cubase Remote function on and off.

DTX900 Owners Manual 25

Setting Up

Creating a Song by Using a Computer

Setting up the DTX900

On the DTX900, you need to set the Local Control parame- ter to off in order to avoid a double sound. When MIDI Thru is set to on in a DAW/sequencer soft- ware on your computer, the note events you play on the DTX900 are transmitted to the computer then returned back to the DTX900, producing a double sound, since the tone generator block is receiving performance data (MIDI data) from both the keyboard directly and the com- puter. To prevent such a situation, you need to separate the keyboard block from the tone generator block of the DTX900. This is why Local Control should be set to off.

1

Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode, then press the [F5] MIDI but- ton followed by the [SF1] SWITCH button.

2

Move the cursor to the LocalCtrl, then set this parameter to off.

3

Press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store this setting.

Setting up the DAW on the computer

1

Set MIDI Thru to on on the DAW.

By setting MIDI Thru to on, the MIDI data generated by playing the pad and transmitted to the computer will be returned back to the DTX900. As shown in the example below, the MIDI data transmitted from the DTX900 then recorded to the computer via MIDI chan- nel 1 will be returned back from the computer to the DTX900 via MIDI channel 3 according to the setting of the recording track. As a result, the tone generator of the DTX900 will sound the MIDI data generated by playing the pad as MIDI data of channel 3.

The instructions below show how to use the DTX900 as a MIDI tone generator. In this case, actual MIDI sequence data is to be transmitted from a DAW or sequencer on the computer.

Setting up the DAW on the computer

1

Set the MIDI port on the DTX900.

2

Start playback of the MIDI le.

Recording Your Performance on the DTX900 to Computer

NOTE

The acronym DAW (digital audio workstation) refers to music software for recording, editing and mixing audio and MIDI data, such as Cubase.

NOTE

For detailed instructions, refer to the manual of the DAW you are using.

Song Playback From a Computer Using the DTX900 as a Tone Generator

USB TO HOST terminal

Tone generator block

(recognizing MIDI

Channel 3 data)

Keyboard (output via

MIDI Channel 1)

Local Control = off

IN CH1

OUT CH3

Computer (Cubase, etc.)

MIDI Through = on

DTX900

26 DTX900 Owners Manual

Setting Up

Adjusting the Sound and Display Contrast

You can adjust the total volume levels of the DTX900 sound. Using the MASTER slider adjusts the output volume of the ste- reo mix from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks. Using the PHONES slider adjusts the output volume of the stereo-mixed sounds for the PHONES jack. This is independent from the MASTER slider setting. For details about all of the sliders as well as the PHONES and MASTER, see page 31.

If the display is not easily visible, use the Contrast control on the rear panel to adjust for optimum visibility.

888

Adjust the total volume by using the MASTER slider/PHONES slider

Adjust the display contrast with the Contrast control.

DTX900

NOTE

Keep in mind that the LCD display is not a touch screen type. Do not touch and press the display directly or forcefully.

DTX900 Owners Manual 27

Quick Guide How to Play the Drum Pads

Snare/Tom Hi-Hat Cymbal

Just as on an acoustic snare, you can hit the drum pad (e.g., XP120SD illustrated below) in three different ways below. Keep in mind that the example XP120SD illus- trated below is divided into three sections.

Head Shot

Hitting the main surface of the pad produces the Head Shot sound.

Open Rim Shot

Hitting the Rim section closest to you produces the Open Rim Shot sound.

Closed Rim Shot

Hitting the Rim section farthest from you produces the Closed Rim Shot sound.

As with an acoustic hi-hat cymbal, you can play the cym- bal pad (e.g., RHH135 illustrated below) along with the Hi-Hat Controller (HH65, etc.) via the ways as illustrated below. Keep in mind that the example RHH135 illustrated below is divided into two sections.

Open/Close

In addition to the Foot Close sound obtained pressing the Hi-Hat Controller, you can hold and press the Controller down even more rmly (in the closed condition) for get- ting a tighter closed hi-hat sound.

Bow Shot

Hitting the main surface of the pad (the bow section located between the cup and edge) produces the Bow Shot sound.

Edge Shot

Hitting the outside edge of the pad produces the Edge Shot sound.

Hi-Hat Splash

Pressing the Hi-Hat Controller then releasing it immedi- ately produces the Hi-Hat Splash sound.

Closed Rim Shot (rim 2)

Head Shot (main pad)

Open Rim Shot (rim 1) Bow Shot

Edge Shot

28 DTX900 Owners Manual

How to Play the Drum Pads

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

Ride Cymbal

As with an acoustic ride cymbal, you can play the cymbal pad (e.g., PCY155 illustrated below) via the various ways as illustrated below. Keep in mind that the example PCY155 illustrated below is divided into three sections.

Bow Shot Hitting the main surface of the pad (bow section located between the cup and edge) produces the Bow Shot sound.

Edge Shot Hitting the outside edge produces the Edge Shot sound.

Bell Shot Hitting the cup produces the Bell Shot sound.

Choke Grabbing the edge of the Cymbal pad immediately after hitting it will stop the sound.

Mute Hitting the pad while holding the edge produces a muted sound.

Bell Shot (rim 2)

Bow Shot

Edge Shot (rim 1) NOTE Depending on the voice assigned to the Edge section, the sound may not

stop immediately.

DTX900 Owners Manual 29

Quick Guide

Playing the DTX900

Now that your DTX900 is properly connected, its time to make some music!

Hitting the Pads While hitting the pads, move the MASTER slider or PHONES slider on the panel to raise the overall volume to a comfortable level.

Selecting a Drum Kit A Drum Kit is a collection of drum sounds (or voices) that play when you hit the pads. Try selecting some of the Drum Kits and enjoy the variety of sounds and drum setups available.

1 Press the [DRUM KIT] button to enter the Drum Kit Select display. If another display appears, press the [F1] PLAY button to call up the Drum Kit Select display.

1 Drum Kit number Indicates the current Drum Kit bank, number and its name. PRE: 01 PRE: 50 are preset kits and USR: 01 USR: 50 are user kits stored in internal ash ROM, while EXT-A: 01 EXT-P: 99 are user kits stored in the external USB storage device con- nected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

B Drum Kit icon Indicates the music genre of the current Drum Kit.

C [SF1] VAR When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black

), the Variation Effect is applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white ), the Variation Effect is not applied to the Drum Kit sound.

D [SF2] REVERB When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black

), the Reverb Effect is applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white ), the Reverb Effect is not applied to the Drum Kit sound.

E [SF3] CHORUS When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black

), the Chorus Effect is applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white ), the Chorus Effect is not applied to the Drum Kit sound.

F [SF4] << BANK

G [SF5] BANK >> Use these buttons to change the Drum Kit Bank. (PRE, USR, EXT-A, EXT-B EXT-P)

2 Select the desired Drum Kit by using the [INC/YES] button, [DEC/ NO] button or data dial. Try out the different Drum Kits and select one Drum Kit you like.

NOTE Keep in mind that the example

displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

2

6 74 53

1

NOTE With the initial default settings,

the Drum Kit number is shown also in the LED display.

Some preset Drum Kits have Pad Songs and Drum Loop Voices that will start when the corresponding pad is hit.

The Drum Kit icon can be changed by setting the Icon parameter in the display called up via [F6] OTHER [SF4] NAME (page 97).

If identical voices are assigned to the same Channel-10 MIDI note numbers in both the newly selected kit and the previous kit, it is normal for voices for the corre- sponding pads to continue to play when the new drum kit is selected.

30 DTX900 Owners Manual

Playing the DTX900

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

Adjusting the Volume by Using the Sliders You can change the volume for each pad and adjust the overall balance of the Drum Kit by using the sliders on the front panel.

1 MASTER slider Adjusts the output volume of the stereo mix from the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.

B PHONES slider Adjusts the output volume of the stereo-mixed sounds for the PHONES jack. This is independent from the MASTER slider setting.

C CLICK slider Adjusts the output volume of the click sound.

D ACCOMP slider Adjusts the output volume of the accompaniment parts (those other than MIDI chan- nel 10) in the Song.

E KICK slider Adjusts the volume of the bass drum. You can change the destination instruments or voices of which the volume is adjusted by setting the SliderSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

F SNARE slider Adjusts the volume of the snare drum. You can change the destination instruments or voices of which the volume is adjusted by setting the SliderSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

G TOM slider Adjusts the volume of the toms. You can change the destination instruments or voices of which the volume is adjusted by setting the SliderSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

H CYMBAL slider Adjusts the volume of the cymbals. You can change the destination instruments or voices of which the volume is adjusted by setting the SliderSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

I HI-HAT slider Adjusts the volume of the hi-hat cymbals. You can change the destination instruments or voices of which the volume is adjusted by setting the SliderSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

J MISC slider Adjusts the volume of miscellaneous rhythm or percussion sounds other than snare and bass drums, toms, hi-hats, and ride and crash cymbals. You can change the desti- nation instruments or voices of which the volume is adjusted by setting the SliderSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

21 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J

DTX900 Owners Manual 31

Quick Guide

Playing Along With the Click

Try playing the DTX900 along with the click (metronome). The DTX900 is equipped with a high-performance metro- nome that gives you a comprehensive variety of settings and allows you to create complex rhythms.

Start the Click (Metronome) Press the [CLICK ON/OFF] button to start the click sound. The red lamp lights on the rst beat of every measure when the click or a Song is playing. The other beats are indicated with a green light.

Press the [CLICK ON/OFF] button again to stop. You can adjust the volume of the click sound by moving the CLICK slider.

NOTE The current Tempo value can be

shown on the LED display by set- ting the LED Display parameter to tempo in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF5] OTHER.

Tempo value

Setting the Click volume level

1st beat (red) Other beats (green)

32 DTX900 Owners Manual

Playing Along With the Click

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

Changing the Tempo and Time Signature (Beat) of the Click

1 Press the [CLICK] button to enter the Click mode.

2 Press the [F1] PLAY button to call up the Click Play display, if necessary.

1 BEAT (Time Signature) Indicates the time signature of the Click. You can select one of the following values.

B TEMPO

Indicates the tempo value of the Click. You can set the value over the following range.

3 Move the cursor to the TEMPO or BEAT (Time Signature) by using the Cursor buttons, then set the value by using the [INC/YES] but- ton, [DEC/NO] button or data dial.

Settings 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

21

NOTE When MIDI Sync ([UTILITY]

[F5] MIDI [SF2] SYNC MIDI Sync) is set to MIDI, MIDI is displayed as the TEMPO value and cannot be set.

Settings 030 300

Cursor Setting the valueMoving the cursor

DTX900 Owners Manual 33

Quick Guide

Tap Tempo

With the Tap Tempo Function, you can set the Song or clicks tempo by manually tapping in the tempo on a pad. This lets you set whatever tempo you desire for playing or practicing. The Audition button can also be used to set the tempo instead of tapping on a pad.

1 Press the [CLICK] button to enter the Click mode.

2 Press the [F3] TAP button to call up the Tap display.

1 TEMPO Indicates the tempo value.

3 Tap on the pad at the tempo in which you want to play (or use the Audition button). You can hit any of the pads. The tempo is detected from the timing at which you hit the pad, and is shown in the LED display and indicated as a TEMPO value in the LCD display. The Tempo value in the LED display will be replaced with the Drum Kit number in a few seconds after performing the Tap with the initial default status when shipped from the factory.

4 Press the [CLICK ON/OFF] button to hear your newly set tempo. The tempo value will be applied to Song playback and Click playback immediately if you change the tempo during playback.

Settings 030 300

1

NOTE When the PadFunc parameter

(page 126) is set to tap tempo in the display called up via [UTIL- ITY] [F2] PAD [SF2] PAD- FUNC, the pad specied as source in this display can be used for the Tap Tempo function even if any display other than the Click Tap display is shown.

When MIDI Sync ([UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF2] SYNC MIDI Sync) is set to MIDI, MIDI is displayed as the TEMPO value and the Tap Tempo function is not available.

Tempo value

34 DTX900 Owners Manual

e

Quick Guide

Playing Along With a Song

Q ui

ck G

ui d

The DTX900 contains a wide variety of Preset Songs, organized into the following three categories.

Demo Songs These Songs are created to showcase the high-quality sound of the DTX900.

Practice Songs These Songs are created to help you practice in a wide variety of musical genres.

Pad Songs (page 93) These Songs are created to be called up (during a performance, for example) by hitting a pad.

Try selecting among these and play along with themthey are effective tools that help you learn how to drum and mas- ter drumming techniques. The DTX900 conveniently lets you mute the drum part of a Song and have only the bass part sound during playback, so you can play the drum part yourself.

Song Playback Select one of the DTX900s Preset Songs and listen to it. The Preset Songs include accompaniment with keyboard, brass, and other voices as well as drum sounds. For a list of the Preset Songs, see the separate Data List booklet.

1 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode.

2 Call up the Song Play display by pressing the [F1] PLAY button, if necessary.

1 Song number Indicates the current Song number. When a Preset Song is selected, one of the categories (Demo, Practice and Pad- Song) is shown at right of the Song number.

PRE: Preset Song USR: User Song EXT: External Song saved in the root directory of the USB storage device as a Standard

MIDI le (format 0).

B Song name

Indicates the name of the current Song.

NOTE Keep in mind that the example

displays shown in this manual are for instruction purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

Settings PRE: 01 PRE: 87, USR: 01 USR: 50, EXT: 01 EXT: 99

2

3

1

4

DTX900 Owners Manual 35

Playing Along With a Song

Quick Guide

C Drum Kit

At the top of the display, the Drum Kit specied by the current Song is shown. When the L indication is shown (by pressing the [F6] KITLOCK button), the Drum Kit cannot be changed.

D [F6] KITLOCK

Press this button to turn the L indication (Kit Lock) on. In this status, the current Drum Kit cannot be changed by the Song data. When Kit Lock is turned off, the Drum Kit number will change to the one specied in the current Song: When a Song is selected. When playback of a Song reaches the end and stops automatically. When the beginning of the current song is called up by pressing the [p] button.

When Kit Lock is turned on, the Drum Kit number is maintained, even if one of the operations above are performed.

3 After moving the cursor to the Song number, select the desired Song by using the [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button or data dial. Changing the Song calls up the Drum Kit specied by the new Song. When the L indication (Kit Lock) is turned on, the current Drum Kit will be maintained even if you change the Song number.

4 Press the [>/] (Playback/Stop) button to start the selected Song. The lamp lights during Song playback.

5 Press the [>/] (Playback/Stop) button again to stop playback. Press the [>/] (Playback/Stop) button once more to resume playback from that point.

To start playback of the Song midway through, set the desired location by using the controls below, then press the [>/] (Play) button. These operations can also be executed during playback.

Playback From the Middle of the Song

Forward Press the [f] (Forward) button.

Fast forward Hold the [f] (Forward) button.

Rewind Press the [r] (Rewind) button.

Fast Rewind Hold the [r] (Rewind) button.

Move to the top of the Song Press the [p] button.

36 DTX900 Owners Manual

Playing Along With a Song

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

From the Song Play display, you can change the Song playback position by following the operations below.

1 MEAS (Measure) Indicates the current position of the Song.

1 Move the cursor to MEAS (Measure).

2 Move forward or backward through the measures by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and the data dial.

You can set repeated Song playback (the Song plays from beginning to end and repeats). When is selected, the Song plays from beginning to end and stops automatically.

B Repeat

Fast Forward/Rewind

1

NOTE When the cursor is located at

MEAS, the NUM icon is shown at the menu corresponding to the [SF6] button. In this condition, you can use the [SF1] [SF5] and [F1] [F5] buttons as number but- tons by pressing the [SF6] NUM button. For details, see page 14.

Repeat Playback

NOTE The Song Repeat setting on the

[F1] PLAY display is temporary and cannot be maintained as data. If you want to apply the Repeat setting to the Song data, set the Repeat parameter in the display called up via [SONG] [F2] JOB [SF1] SONG 03: Song Name, Tempo, Repeat.

Preset Songs and User Songs include the Repeat setting. This is why the Repeat setting shown on the [F1] PLAY display is changed when a certain Preset Song or User Song is selected. On the other hand, SMF Songs (EXT: 01 99) on the USB storage device include no Repeat setting. This is why the Repeat setting shown on the [F1] PLAY display is main- tained even when a certain SMF Song is selected.

Settings (Normal playback) (Repeated playback)

2

DTX900 Owners Manual 37

Playing Along With a Song

Quick Guide

Adjusting the Volume of the Song Accompaniment You can adjust the volume of the Song accompaniment part (other than drum part) by moving the ACCOMP slider on the front panel. Use both the ACCOMP slider and the MASTER slider (overall volume of Song and pads) to adjust the balance between the Song and your drum part.

Changing the Tempo of the Song You can change the tempo of the current Song by following the operations below.

1 TEMPO Indicates the current tempo.

B BEAT (Time Signature)

Indicates the time signature of the Click sound.

1 Use the Cursor buttons to move the cursor to the location to be edited.

2 Set the value by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and the data dial.

Adjusting the overall volume

Adjusting the accompaniment part of the Song

1 2

NOTE The tempo value can be shown

on the LED display by setting the LED Display parameter in the dis- play called up via [UTILITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF5] OTHER.

Each of the Preset Songs includes the original tempo set- ting. This tempo value is called up automatically when the Song is selected and the top of the Song is called up by pressing the [p] button.

If you want to maintain the tempo value even when you change the Preset Song, set the Tempo Link parameter to off in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF5] OTHER.

The Song Tempo value on the [F1] PLAY display is temporary and cannot be maintained as data. If you want to apply the Tempo value to the Song data, set the Tempo parameter in the dis- play called up via the [SONG] [F2] JOB [SF1] SONG 03: Song Name, Tempo, Repeat.

Settings 030 300

Settings 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

38 DTX900 Owners Manual

Playing Along With a Song

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

Song Part Mute Setting The Mute function lets you turn on/off the rhythm (drum & percussion sound) part, bass part and other accompaniment part individually, or turn selected tracks on/off. For example, you could mute the rhythm part to play rhythms yourself using the pads, or you could play along with just the bass part sounding, or you could jam with an actual bass player with all other accompaniment parts enabled. The Mute status can be conrmed by checking the tabs corresponding to the [SF1] [SF3] buttons. A part name indication of DRUM, BASS, and OTHER in black characters means that the corresponding part is muted while a part name indi- cation in white characters means that the corresponding part is turned on. Pressing these buttons toggles part playback on and off (Mute).

1 [SF1] DRUM Pressing this button toggles DRUM part playback on and off (Mute). This button does not affect the same part included in Track 2 of the Song.

B [SF2] BASS

Pressing this button toggles BASS part playback on and off (Mute).

C [SF3] OTHER

Pressing this button toggles OTHER part playback on and off (Mute).

D [SF4] TR1 (Track 1)

Pressing this button toggles Track 1 playback on and off (Mute).

E [SF5] TR2 (Track 2)

Pressing this button toggles Track 2 playback on and off (Mute).

On Off (Mute)

Mute status Example: DRUM part (rhythm part)

1 2 3 4 5

NOTE The Preset Songs consist of mul-

tiple parts (MIDI channels) and have been recorded to a single track (Track 1). For details about the Song data structure (relation- ship between parts and tracks), see page 67.

When no data is recorded to Track 1 or 2, the corresponding tab (TR1 or TR2) is not shown in the display. When a Preset Song is selected, TR2 is not shown in the display because no data is recorded to Track 2 for all the Pre- set Songs.

Tracks TR1 and TR2 of an exter- nal Song (EXT: 01 99) saved to a USB storage device cannot be muted.

DTX900 Owners Manual 39

Quick Guide

Creating a Drum Kit

The DTX900 lets you create your own original Drum Kit by assigning your favorite Drum Voice to each pad and setting its tuning, pan, decay, reverb, etc.

Terminology Drum Voice A Drum Voice is an percussion/drum instrument assigned to each pad. Assigning Drum Voices to pads makes up a Drum Kit.

Drum Kit A Drum Kit is a collection of Drum Voices assigned to the individual pads. Selecting a Drum Kit assigns the Drum Voice(s) to each pad.

Voice Set When you connect a stereo pad (referred to as a two-zone pad and three-zone pad) to the Trigger Input jack (pages 12 and 60), a different Drum Voice is triggered by the pad depending on the section you hit. A set of Voices that can be triggered from a single pad is referred to as a Voice Set. You can assign a Voice Set to each pad (Trigger Input jacks).

Here, select a Voice Set for each of pads (Trigger Input jacks) to create your original Drum Kit.

1 Press the [DRUM KIT] button to enter the Drum Kit mode, then press the [F1] PLAY button as necessary.

2 Select the desired Drum Kit by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. A good idea is to select a Drum Kit that is close in sound to the type of kit you intend to create. Here, select PRE: 01.

3 Press the [F2] VOICE button, then the [SF1] SELECT button to call up the display shown below.

1 INPUT or SOURCE When INPUT is shown here, the Trigger Input jack (pages 12 and 60) is currently selected for editing, and you can change it to the desired one to which you want to assign the Voice Set. When SOURCE is shown here, the Trigger Input Source (page 61) is currently selected for editing, and you can change it to the desired one to which you want to assign the Voice.

B Voice Set category

Preset Voice Sets are divided into the following categories, which you can select here.

5

4

1 2

3

NOTE The Voice Set does not include

the User Voice assignment.

Settings kick, snare, tom, cymbal, hihat, perc, efct

40 DTX900 Owners Manual

Creating a Drum Kit

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

C Voice Set number

You can select the Voice Set number here from the Voice Set category selected above. In the INPUT display, an asterisk (*) will appear when the Voice set at each Trigger Input source is different from that in the current Voice Set.

D [SF5] SOURCE or INPUT

Pressing this button toggles the indication at the top left corner between INPUT (Trigger Input jack) and SOURCE (Trigger Input Source).

E [SF6] Input Lock

Pressing this button turns the Input Lock (L indicator at the right corner of the dis- play) on or off. Normally, the Trigger Input jack or Trigger Input Source to be edited can be determined by hitting the corresponding pad. If you want to maintain it even if you hit any pad, press this button to turn the Input Lock (L indicator) on.

4 When INPUT is shown at the tab corresponding to the [SF5] button, press the [SF5] button so that INPUT is shown at the right corner of the display.

5 Select the Trigger Input jack by hitting the corresponding pad or by moving the cursor to the INPUT then using the data dial, [INC/ YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. The corresponding illustration appears.

6 Move the cursor to the Voice Set category, then select the desired category by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

7 Move the cursor to the Voice Set number, then select the desired number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

The [E] indicator When changing the value of the parameter in the Drum Kit mode, the [E] (Edit) Indicator will appear on the top left corner of the LCD display. This gives a quick conrmation that the current Drum Kit has been modied but not yet stored. To store the current edited status, follow the instructions on the next page.

Settings 0 127 (0: No Assign)

Edit Indicator

DTX900 Owners Manual 41

Creating a Drum Kit

Quick Guide

To store the original Drum Kit youve created thus far, follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The following display appears.

2 Select the destination Drum Kit memory. First, move the cursor to the Drum Kit bank then select the desired one from USR and EXT-A through EXT-P. When you want to select a Drum Kit from EXT-A through EXT-P, make sure to connect the appropriate USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Second, move the cursor to the Drum Kit number, then select the desired one.

3 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button again. The display prompts you for conrmation. To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

4 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation.

Storing the Edited Drum Kit

When the [E] indicator is shown (meaning that the current Drum Kit has been modied but not yet stored), all your edits will be lost when selecting a different Drum Kit. Keep in mind that the Drum Kit may also be inadvertently changed by selecting a different Song. Make sure to store the edited Drum Kit before selecting a different Drum Kit or Song.

NOTICE

Never attempt to turn off the power while the message Please keep power on is shown; all data you have created may be lost. Only use the voltage specied as correct for the DTX900.

Destination Drum Kit numberDestination Drum Kit bank

NOTICE

42 DTX900 Owners Manual

e

Quick Guide

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Q ui

ck G

ui d

In this section, youll learn how to record your performances and create Songs using the Song Recording features.

Recording System Recording can be done with any of the User Songs. You cannot record your performance to Preset Songs.

Each User Song contains two tracks available for recording. Recording can be done to one of the tracks at a time.

A recorded Song doesnt contain recordings of the audio sounds of the drums, but rather the performance information or data of precisely when and how each pad was hit as MIDI events. Also, MIDI data produced by an external MIDI key- board connected to the MIDI IN connector can be recorded as well as MIDI sequence data received via the USB TO HOST terminal from your computer.

The recorded Song data is not audio data but MIDI sequence data, allowing you to freely change the tempo, Drum Kit and Drum Voice when playing back the recorded Song.

The tempo and time signature (Beat parameter) can be recorded only as the header data. During Song recording, these cannot be recorded, although the tempo can be changed.

For more information about the Song data structure, see page 67.

Recording Methods

Generally, MIDI sequencers provide two methods of recording: Realtime Recording and Step Recording. The DTX900 provides only

Realtime Recording. This method lets you record the performance data as it is played, allowing you to capture all the nuances of an actual

drum performance.

When replace is selected as Recording Type in the REC STANDBY display (called up via the [REC] button in the Song mode), you can

record your drum performance to a track which contains no data. Keep in mind that you cannot record your drum performance to a track

which contains any data. If you want to replace your performance data with already-recorded data, use the Clear Track Job (page 101) or

Clear Song Job (page 99) before recording.

When overdub is selected as the Recording Type in the REC STANDBY display (called up via the [REC] button in the Song mode),

loop recording is enabled, allowing you to add more performance data to a track that already contains data. The rst lap in the loop

recording is kept, and other parts you play in the successive laps are added on top. This method lets you build up complex phrases.

The built-in sequencer offers two sequence tracks (Tr1 and Tr2) for each Song, and you can use them for both recording and playback.

Each track can contain any event on any MIDI channel (1 to 16). This means you can connect a keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the

DTX900 and (with the help of a keyboard playing friend) record both the keyboard performance and your Drum Kit playing in real time

onto a single track.

If you merge contents on both tracks into one track and empty the other track by using the Mix Track Job (page 100), you can record the

new data to the empty track separately.

Realtime Recording

Replace and Overdub (Loop)

Two Tracks and Multi-channel Recording

DTX900 Owners Manual 43

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Quick Guide

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

1 Select the desired Drum Kit in the Drum Kit mode.

2 Press the [SONG] button to enter the Song mode then press the [F1] PLAY button to call up the Song Play display as necessary.

3 Press the [F6] KITLOCK button so that the L indicator appears at the top right of the display. This step is necessary because selecting a Song may change a Drum Kit.

4 Select a User Song to be recorded by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/ NO] buttons and the data dial. Make sure to select a User Song that contains no data and does not indicate TR1 and TR2 in the display.

5 Press the [REC] button to call up the REC STANDBY display.

1 Type (Recording Type) Determines the Recording Type. You can select replace or overdub. For details, see page 43.

B Track (Recording Track)

Determines the track to be recorded.

C Quantize

Determines the Record Quantize value. Record Quantize automatically aligns the timing of notes as you record. When the cursor is located at the Quantize value, the note type icon is shown at the menu corresponding to the [SF6] button. In this condi- tion, you can call up a list of the note type icons by pressing the [SF6] button, then select the desired item from the list.

NOTE When a Preset Song is

selected, this step may not be necessary, since pressing the [REC] button selects an empty User Song. If all the User Songs contain data (if there is no empty Song), the message Seq data is not empty appears, indicating that you cannot call up the REC STANDBY display by pressing the [REC] button in step 5. In this case, step 4 here is neces- sary.

Settings replace, overdub

Settings 1, 2

Settings

When 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8 or 15/8 is selected: off, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note, dot- ted 1/4 note When another value is selected: off, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note

54

67

2

3

1

44 DTX900 Owners Manual

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

How Quantize Works (example)

D Beat (Time Signature) Determines the time signature of the Song.

E Tempo Determines the tempo of the Song.

F MeasLength (Measure Length) Determines the length of the Song to be recorded.

G Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which recording starts.

6 Set the Type parameter to replace by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.

7 Move the cursor to Track, then select a track to be recorded. Set other parameters as necessary, such as Tempo, Beat (time signature), Measure (from which recording starts) and Quantize.

8 Turn [CLICK ON/OFF] on if you want to use the Click sound. For details about the Click, see page 32.

9 Press the [>/] (Play/Stop) button to start recording.

10 After recording stops automatically when the last measure (specied by the Measure Length) is reached, press the [>/] (Play/Stop) button to hear the newly recorded Song. You can stop recording at the middle of the Song by pressing the [>/] button.

11 Save the recorded Song to a USB storage device.

Settings 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

Range 030 300

Recorded notes were not played in time.

The Quantize Function aligns the timing.

Perfect timing

NOTE When you select an already-

recorded Song, you cannot set the Measure Length to a value greater than that of the selected Song. If you need to set a greater Measure Length, add measures to the Song manually by using the Create Measure Job (page 102) before recording.

Range 001 999 (differs depending on the status of the User Song and starting measure of recording)

Settings 001 999 (differs depending on the status of the User Song)

Be careful to avoid turning the power off or disconnecting the AC adaptor during record- ing; otherwise your recorded data will be lost.

The recorded Song data resides temporarily in DRAM (page 76). Because data con- tained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save any data residing in DRAM to a USB storage device before turning off the power.

NOTICE

NOTICE

DTX900 Owners Manual 45

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Quick Guide

Recording Additional Notes to an Already-recorded Track (Overdub) Use the Overdub recording method when you want to add more data to a track that already contains data. The Overdub Recording procedure is almost the same as Replace except that the Record type is set to overdub and you need to press the [>/] (Play/Stop) button when you want to stop recording.

When the song reaches the end of the last measure, it will automatically start again from the beginning and new data will be added to the tracks previous data.

Recording Along With the Preset Song Although your drum performance cannot be recorded to a Preset Song, you can add your own drum performance data to a Preset Song by copying the Preset Song data to a User Song.

1 Select an empty User Song (containing no data) in the Song mode. Note that the TR1 and TR2 indications are not shown in the display when an empty User Song is selected.

2 Press the [F2] JOB button followed by the [SF1] SONG button to call up the SONG JOB SELECT display.

3 Move the cursor to 01: Copy Song then press the [ENTER/ STORE] button to call up the Copy Song Job display. This Job lets you copy the source Song (specied in this Job display) to the current Song.

1 Song bank and number Indicates the bank number and name of the source Song.

Type = overdub

1

46 DTX900 Owners Manual

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

4 Select the desired Preset Song as the copy source then press the

[ENTER/STORE] button. The display prompts you for conrmation. To cancel the Copy Song operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

5 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Copy Song operation.

6 Press the [REC] button to call up the REC STANDBY display.

7 Move the cursor to Type, then set this parameter to replace.

8 Move the cursor to Track, then set this parameter to 2. Because the Preset Song data is recorded only to track 1, you can record your drum performance to track 2 along while track 1 plays back.

9 Press the [SF1] DRUM button to mute the drum part of the Preset Song data.

10 Press the [>/] (Play/Stop) button to start recording.

11 After recording stops automatically when the last measure is reached, press the [>/] (Play/Stop) button to hear the newly recorded Song. You can stop recording at the middle of the Song by pressing the [>/] button.

12 Save the recorded Song to a USB storage device.

Be careful to avoid turning the power off or disconnecting the AC adaptor during record- ing; otherwise your recorded data will be lost.

Track = 2

Type = replace

NOTICE

DTX900 Owners Manual 47

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Quick Guide

Re-recording a Track After Clearing To record again, use the following procedure to clear previously recorded data in the track, then try recording again.

1 With the User Song to be re-recorded selected, press the [F2] JOB button followed by the [SF2] TRACK button in the Song mode to call up the TRACK JOB SELECT display.

2 Move the cursor to 04: Clear Track, then press the [ENTER/ STORE] button to call up the Clear Track Job display.

1 Track Indicates the track to be cleared.

3 Select a track to be cleared. If you have copied the Preset Song data to the User Song and then recorded your drum performance to track 2, select 2 here.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The display prompts you for conrmation. To cancel the Clear Track operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

5 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Clear Track operation. The data recorded to the specied track will be erased.

6 Re-record your drum performance to the cleared track. Follow the instructions on page 44.

1

48 DTX900 Owners Manual

Recording Your Drum Performance to a Song

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

Assigning a Name to a User Song You can assign an original name to a User Song.

1 With the desired User Song selected, press the [F2] JOB button followed by the [SF1] SONG button in the Song mode to call up the SONG JOB SELECT display.

2 Move the cursor to 03: Song Name, Tempo, Repeat then press the [ENTER/STORE] button to call up the Job display.

1 Name Determines the Song name, which can contain up to 10 characters. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

B [SF6] LIST

When the cursor is located at Name, this [LIST] icon appears at the right bottom of the display indicating that you can call up the Character List display by holding the [SF6] button. For details, see page 15.

3 Enter the Song name by following the instructions on page 15. You can call up the character list by pressing the [SF6] LIST button, then select the desired one from the list.

2

1

DTX900 Owners Manual 49

Quick Guide

Using the Groove Check Function

Another highly useful feature of the DTX900 is the Groove Check function. As you play along with a song or the click, Groove Check compares your timing with the song or click playback and lets you know how accurate your playing is. The related Rhythm Gate func- tionin which the sound is cancelled if your timing is offalso provides a great way for you to improve your technique.

Setting the Check Timing This section describes how to specify the note timing to which the Groove Check and Rhythm Gate is applied.

1 Press the [CLICK] button to enter the Click mode.

2 Press the [F4] GROOVE button, then the [SF3] SETTING button.

1 Note Determines the note timing to which Groove Check and Rhythm Gate are applied.

B Swing

This parameter is available only when 8th note triplet is selected in the Note parameter. This parameter lets you specify the third note timing of the triplet as correct. In other words, this determines how your swing feel will be evaluated with Groove Check.

NOTE Groove Check can only be used

during song or click playback, and only from the Groove Check dis- play called up via [CLICK] [F4] GROOVE [SF1] G.CHECK, while Rhythm Gate can only be used during song or click play- back, and only from the Rhythm Gate display called up via [CLICK] [F4] GROOVE [SF2] R.GATE.

21

Settings

When 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8 or 15/8 is selected: whole note, dotted 1/4 note, 8th note, 16th note When another value is selected: whole note, 1/4 note, 8th note, 16th note, 8th note triplet

Range

-39 0 +39 0 (standard): Assumes that the correct timing is exactly at the third note of the triplet. -39 (minimum): Assumes that the correct timing is close to the third note at 16th note resolution. +39 (maximum): Assumes that the correct timing is close to the fourth note at 16th note resolution.

swing = 0 swing = -39 swing = +39

Assuming the timing around here is correct.

50 DTX900 Owners Manual

Using the Groove Check Function

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

3 Move the cursor to the Note parameter by using the Cursor but-

tons, then select the desired note type by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.

4 If the 8th note triplet is selected in step 3, move the cursor to the Swing parameter, then select the desired value.

Trying Out Groove Check

1 Select the desired Song (if you are using a Song).

2 Press the [CLICK] button to enter the Click mode, then set the Note and Swing parameters by following the instructions on page 50.

3 Press the [F4] GROOVE button, then the [SF1] G.CHECK button to call up the Groove Check display.

1 Trigger Input 1 5 Here, you can set which pads (signals received via the Trigger Input jacks) will be monitored by Groove Check. Any (or all) pads can be selected, and up to ve differ- ent pads can be monitored at once. The ALL indication shows the result for all sounds (from all pads). The NO ASGN indication means no pad is selected. Lines showing other values indicate the result for the signal received via the corresponding Trigger Input jack.

4 Move the cursor to the Trigger Input, then select the desired one.

5 After the setup is completed, start the selected Song or Click sound, then play the drum pads along with playback. Groove Check starts as soon as you hit the drum pad. The result for each hit (accu- racy of the hit timing) is shown in the display in real time.

6 Stop playback then conrm the result of the Groove Check. For details on the Groove Check display indications, see below.

1

Settings NO ASGN, SNARE PAD15, ALL

DTX900 Owners Manual 51

Using the Groove Check Function

Quick Guide

Groove Check Results In the Groove Check display, you can view the result of the check and see how accurate your timing is in real time. With the center line being correct timing, hits indicated at the left are early, and hits on the right are late. For details on each indication, see below.

Trying Out Rhythm Gate The Rhythm Gate function lets you check the accuracy of your hit timing more nely and strictly. The sound is produced only when you hit at the correct (allowable) timing, which can be specied beforehand.

1 Select the desired Song (if you are using a Song).

2 Press the [CLICK] button to enter the Click mode, then set the Note and Swing parameters by following the instructions on page 50.

3 Press the [F4] GROOVE button, then the [SF2] R.GATE button to call up the Rhythm Gate display.

1 Trigger Input 1 5 Here, you can set which pads (signals received via the Trigger Input jacks) will be monitored by Rhythm Gate. Any (or all) pads can be selected, and up to ve different pads can be monitored at once. The ALL indication shows the result for all sounds (from all pads). The NO ASGN indication means no pad is selected. Lines showing other values indicate the result for the signal received via the corresponding Trigger Input jack.

B Rhythm Gate Range

The crosshatch bar graph which indicates the hit timing range (regarded by Rhythm Gate as correct) is specied by setting the EARLY value and LATE value for each Trigger Input. From this display, the pad sound is produced only when hitting the pad within this timing window.

NOTE The interval between the left end

(EARLY position) and the right end (LATE position) is equivalent to the length of a 16th note.Actual timing at which

the pad was hit last. This crosshatch area indicates the range of all your hits so far in this session.

This white line represents the average timing of all your hits so far in this session.

Center line; indicates the correct timing.

1

2 2

Settings NO ASGN, SNARE PAD15, ALL

NOTE This parameter can be set in 1/

120 of a 16th note. The distance from the left edge to the right edge of the display will be equiva- lent to length of 16th note.

Range -59 +59

52 DTX900 Owners Manual

Using the Groove Check Function

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

4 Move the cursor to the Trigger Input, then select the desired one.

When ALL is selected for any one of the lines, no other lines can be used.

5 Move the cursor to the EARLY or LATE column, then set the allowable range by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial. According to the value set here, the Rhythm Gate range (crosshatch bar) becomes wider or narrower.

6 After the setup is completed, start the selected Song or Click sound, then play the drum pads along with playback. The Rhythm Gate starts as soon as you hit the drum pad. The result for each hit (accuracy of the hit timing) is shown in the display in real time.

7 Stop playback, then conrm the result of the Rhythm Gate. For details on the Rhythm Gate display indications, see below.

Rhythm Gate Results In the Rhythm Gate display, you can view the result of the check and see how accurate your timing is in real time. With the center line being correct timing, hits indicated at the left are early, and hits on the right are late. For details on each indication, see below.

Indicates the actual timing at which you hit the pad. The sound is produced only when this timing is within the bar graph.

This bar graph indicates the allowable range (the timing range within which sound is produced). This is different from the bar graph in the Groove Check display, indicates the timing range of all your actual hits.

DTX900 Owners Manual 53

Quick Guide

Saving the Created Data to a USB Storage Device

The File mode provides tools for transferring data between the instrument and the USB stor- age device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. This section describes how to save all the data (including Drum Kit, Drum Voice, Song, and Trigger Setup, etc.) to a USB stor- age device as a single le and load it from the device to the instrument.

File/Folder Selection The illustrations and instructions below show you how to select les and folders on the USB storage devices within the File mode.

NOTE For details about USB storage

devices, see page 21.

Select the File Type (page 113) from the TYPE column, then press the Cursor [M] button to move the cursor to the File/ Directory box at the right section in the display.

Select the directory or le by using the [INC/DEC], [DEC/NO], Cursor [B]/[V] buttons and data dial.

To return to the next highest level, press the [EXIT] button.

To go to the next lowest level, highlight the desired folder and press the [ENTER/STORE] button.

54 DTX900 Owners Manual

Saving the Created Data to a USB Storage Device

Quick Guide

Q ui

ck G

ui de

Saving the Created Data to a USB Storage Device The Save operation can be done via various methods, such as saving all data as a single le or saving a specied type of data (e.g., only Drum Kits) as a single le. This section describes instructions on saving all the data you created in each mode of the DTX900 to a USB storage device as a single le.

After connecting the USB storage device, follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode.

2 Press the [F1] SAVE button to call up the Save display.

3 Move the cursor to the TYPE parameter, then set the File type to AllData by using the data dial or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

4 Move the cursor to the le name input location, then input a le name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to page 15 in the Basic Operation section. You can call up a convenient character list for easier name entry by pressing the [SF6] button.

5 Press the Cursor [M] button to move the cursor to the le/direc- tory select box, then select a destination directory. This step is necessary if you have created a directory as destination on the USB stor- age device. This is step is not necessary if you want to save the le to the root direc- tory.

6 Press the [SF1] EXEC to execute the Save operation. If you are about to overwrite an existing le, the display prompts you for conrma- tion. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation to overwrite the exist- ing le, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it, then enter the le name again.

After the data has been saved, a Completed message appears and operation returns to the original display.

NOTE If you want to call up a sub direc-

tory, move the cursor to the desired directory then press the [ENTER/STORE] button.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions:

Never remove or eject the media from the device (USB storage).

Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

Never turn off the power of the DTX900 or the relevant devices.

NOTICE

DTX900 Owners Manual 55

Saving the Created Data to a USB Storage Device

Quick Guide

Loading a File Saved to a USB Storage Device This section describes instructions on loading a le saved to a USB storage device as an AllData le.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode.

2 Press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

3 Move the cursor to the TYPE parameter, then set the File type to AllData by using the data dial or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

4 Press the Cursor [M] button to move the cursor to the le/direc- tory select box, then select the desired le to be loaded. If the le is saved under any directory, select the directory including the desired le, then press the [ENTER/STORE] button to nd the desired le.

5 Press the [SF1] EXEC to execute the Load operation. After the data has been loaded, a Completed message appears and operation returns to the original display.

Loading a le (extension: T3A) to the DTX900 automatically erases and replaces all exist- ing data in the User memory. Make sure to save any important data to a USB storage device before performing any Load operations.

While the data is being loaded, make sure to follow these precautions:

Never remove or eject the media from the device (USB storage).

Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices.

Never turn off the power of the DTX900 or the relevant devices.

NOTICE

NOTICE

56 DTX900 Owners Manual

Reference Basic Structure of the DTX900

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

This section describes the internal design of the DTX900 so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and con- venient functions of this instrument. Take a few moments here to understand how trigger signals are generated and transferred to the DTX900 when you hit the pads and how the sound is produced.

The Functional Blocks

Pad (Trigger Input Source)

Trigger Signal

Trigger Input jacks

Trigger Setup Preset User

Recording your drum perfor- mance as MIDI data.

Playing the tone generator by hitting the pad.

or

or

MIDI output

Audio output

Tone Generator Drum Kit Created by assigning a Drum Voice to each of the Trigger Input Sources on the pad. The following banks are available. Preset Drum Kit User Drum Kit External Drum Kit A P

Drum Voice Assigned to each Trigger Input Source of the pad to make up a Drum Kit.

Preset Voice

User Voice

Sampling Assigns the audio signal (obtained from the external device) to a User Voice.

Audio signal

Recording the audio signal from the external audio device or microphone in the Sampling mode, or loading the audio le from the USB storage device in the File mode.

Effect Set for each

Drum Kit Reverb Chorus Variation

Set in the Utility mode Master Effect Master EQ

Song Playback Preset Song User Song External Song

Recording Recording your drum performance to a User Song as MIDI data.

P la

yb ac

k

[DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT-TUNE OutputSel

[UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF3] OTHER MIDI IN/OUT

Microphone, etc. CD, MD, etc.

Trigger Signal

DTX900

DTX900 Owners Manual 57

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

Pads (Trigger Input Sources) and Trigger Signals

Hitting the pad produces a trigger signal which includes information about how strongly you hit the pad and what section of the pad you hit. The signal is transmitted via the cable and Trigger Input jack (pages 12 and 60) to the DTX900. The corre- sponding drum sound is triggered in the Tone Generator Block by this trigger signal. One trigger signal triggers one Drum Voice when setting the pad to sound only a single sound at a time. One pad generates one type of trigger signal or multiple types of trigger signals according to the pad model, what section of the pad you hit, how you play the pad and the particular pad settings. The pad generating the trigger signal may be also referred to as Trigger Input Source.

Mono pads generating one type of trigger signal

Mono pads such as the TP65 drum pad and PCY65 cymbal pad can generate and transmit only one type of the trigger signal to the DTX900 regardless of where on the pad you hit.

2-zone pads/3-zone pads generating multiple types of trigger signal

The PCY65S generates two different types of trigger signals and the PCY155 generates three different types of trigger signals depending on where you hit the pad, while the PCY65 generates one type of trigger signal regardless of the location of the hit. Pads generating multiple types of trigger signals depending on where they are hit commonly come in two different types: 2-zone pads or 3-zone pads. The PCY155 illustrated below as example can gener- ate three types of trigger signals from the Pad section, Edge section and Cup section, each of which is a separate Trigger Input Source.

Three Trigger Input Sources on the cymbal pad and the corresponding trigger signals

NOTE The KICK jack is a mono jack and cannot handle multiple trigger signals

even when a 2-zone pad or 3-zone pad is connected.

The Voice assigned to the Trigger Input Source A (Bow section) is triggered.

The Voice assigned to the Trigger Input Source B (Edge section) is triggered.

The Voice assigned to the Trigger Input Source C (Cup section) is triggered.

One cable and One Trigger Input jack handle three types of trigger signals.

Trigger Signal A

Trigger Signal B

Trigger Signal C

Example: PCY155

A: Bow section

B: Edge section

C: Cup section

58 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Pad Controllers generating different types of trigger signals according to the settings

Different types of Trigger Signal are generated also by using the Pad Controller of a drum pad. When a 3-zone snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD) equipped with a Pad Controller is connected to the SNARE jack and the Pad Controller Type parameter is set to snares in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF1] PADCTRL, the XP120SD can generate two different types of trigger signals according to the snappy settings on/off status controlled by the Pad Controller. By combining these two types with the three types generated depending on the particular zone you hit, a total of six differ- ent types of trigger signals can be generated from the XP120SD. For details, see below.

Six types of trigger signals generated by using a 3-zone pad and turning the Snappy setting On/Off

Hi-Hat Controllers generating different types of trigger signals according to the pressure applied

Hi-Hat cymbal pads (e.g., RHH135, 2-zone pad) can generate various types of trigger signal according to how deeply you press the Hi-Hat Controller (e.g., HH65 connected to the RHH135) as well as the two different types of signals generated depending where on the pad you hit.

Obtaining trigger signals from an acoustic drum You can get trigger signals from an acoustic drum or similar percussion instrument by installing an appropriate drum trigger product (e.g., DT10 or DT20). This lets you trigger sounds on the DTX900 by playing the acoustic drum or percussion imt.

A

C

B

A

C

B

Six types of trigger signals for a single pad

Example: XP120SD

When you turn the Pad Controller right to set the Snares On/Off to on:

When you turn the Pad Controller left to set the Snares On/Off to off:

Trigger Signal B

Trigger Signal C

Trigger Signal A

One cable and One Trigger Input jack handle six types of trigger signals.

Trigger Signal B

Trigger Signal C

Trigger Signal A

DTX900 Owners Manual 59

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

The DTX900 provides Trigger Setup parameters for optimum handling of the trigger signals transmitted from the pads and to ensure the expected sounds are produced. The Trigger Setup parameters include sensitivity (determining how the DTX900 responds to the trigger signal) and settings for avoiding problems such as double-triggering (two sounds played at the same time) and cross-talk (mixed input signals between the jacks). The DTX900 lets you create up to ve original settings as User Trigger Setups as well as the nine preset Trigger Setups.

As described above, some pads feature multiple Trigger Input Sources, each of which can generate its own trigger signal. Depending on the jack to which the pad is connected, however, some trigger signals cannot be transmitted to the DTX900. To avoid trigger signal drop outs, refer to the list below when connecting pads to the jacks on the rear panel of the DTX900.

Indicates the corresponding pad model is compatible with 3-zone pads. In case of the XP model and the TP model, three types (two rim sections and head section) of trigger signals are recognized. In case of the PCY model, three types (bow, edge and cup sections) of trigger signals are recognized.

Indicates the corresponding pad model is compatible with 2-zone pads. In case of the RHH model, two types (bow and edge sections) of trigger signals are recognized. In case of the PCY model, three types (bow and edge sections) of trigger signals are recognized.

Indicates the corresponding pad functions as a mono pad.

( ) Indicates the corresponding pad can be connected to the corresponding jack although the preset data such as Drum Kit and Drum Voice will not assume such a case.

Trigger Setup

Pad and Trigger Input Jack

Pads Trigger Input jacks of the DTX900

Model Product name

(1) SNARE (2) TOM1 (3) TOM2 (4) TOM3 (5) TOM4

(6) RIDE (7) CRASH 1 (8) CRASH 2

(9) HI-HAT (10) KICK/(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

Compatible with 2- zone/3-zone pads and Pad Controllers

Compatible with 2- zone/3-zone pads, but not compatible with Pad Controllers

Compatible with 2- zone/3-zone pads, but not compatible with Pad Controllers

Not compatible with 2-zone/3-zone pads

Compatible with 2- zone/3-zone pads, but not compatible with Pad Controllers

XP100T Tom pad ( ) ( ) ( )

XP120T Tom pad ( ) ( ) ( )

XP100SD Snare pad ( ) ( ) ( )

XP120SD Snare pad ( ) ( ) ( )

TP65 Tom pad ( ) ( ) ( )

TP65S Tom pad ( ) ( )

TP100 Tom pad ( ) ( ) ( )

TP120SD Snare pad ( ) ( ) ( )

RHH130 Hi-Hat pad ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

RHH135 Hi-Hat pad ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY65 Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY65S Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY130 Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY130S Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY130SC Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY135 Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY150S Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

PCY155 Cymbal pad ( ) ( ) ( )

KP65 Kick pad ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

KP125 Kick pad ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

KP125W Kick pad ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

DT10 Drum trigger

DT20 Drum trigger

60 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

An entire pad, the particular section you hit and how you play the pad as a source of the trigger signal are collectively referred to as a Trigger Input Source. One Trigger Source generates one type of trigger signal. Depending on the model, up to six Trigger Input Sources are provided in one pad. You can assign a Drum Voice to each Trigger Input Source on the DTX900 by following the instructions on page 79. Refer to the following list when assigning a Drum Voice.

Trigger Input Source List

Trigger Input Sources

Trigger Source Trigger Input jack

How the Trigger Signal is generated LCD indication Full spell

snareHd Snare Head (1) SNARE Hitting the head section of the snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD).

snareOp Snare Open Rim (1) SNARE Hitting the open rim shot section of the snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD).

snareCl Snare Closed Rim (1) SNARE Hitting the closed rim shot section of the snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD).

snrHdOff Snare Head Off (1) SNARE Hitting the head section of the snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD) when the snappy setting (SnaresOn/Off parameter) is turned off.

snrOpOff Snare Open Rim Off (1) SNARE Hitting the open rim shot section of the snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD) when the snappy setting (SnaresOn/Off parameter) is turned off.

snrClOff Snare Closed Rim Off (1) SNARE Hitting the closed rim shot section of the snare drum pad (e.g., XP120SD) when the snappy setting (SnaresOn/Off parameter) is turned off.

tom1Hd Tom 1 Head (2) TOM1 Hitting the head section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

tom1Rm1 Tom 1 Rim 1 (2) TOM1 Hitting the rim 1 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

tom1Rm2 Tom 1 Rim 2 (2) TOM1 Hitting the rim 2 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

: : : :

tom4Hd Tom 4 Head (5) TOM4 Hitting the head section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

tom4Rm1 Tom 4 Rim 1 (5) TOM4 Hitting the rim 1 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

tom4Rm2 Tom 4 Rim 2 (5) TOM4 Hitting the rim 2 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

rideBw Ride Cymbal Bow (6) RIDE Hitting the bow section of the cymbal pad.

rideEg Ride Cymbal Edge (6) RIDE Hitting the edge section of the cymbal pad.

rideCp Ride Cymbal Cup (6) RIDE Hitting the cup section of the cymbal pad.

crash1Bw Crash Cymbal 1 Bow (7) CRASH1 Hitting the bow section of the cymbal pad.

crash1Eg Crash Cymbal 1 Edge (7) CRASH1 Hitting the edge section of the cymbal pad.

crash1Cp Crash Cymbal 1 Cup (7) CRASH1 Hitting the cup section of the cymbal pad.

crash2Bw Crash Cymbal 2 Bow (8) CRASH2 Hitting the bow section of the cymbal pad.

crash2Eg Crash Cymbal 2 Edge (8) CRASH2 Hitting the edge section of the cymbal pad.

crash2Cp Crash Cymbal 2 Cup (8) CRASH2 Hitting the cup section of the cymbal pad.

hhBwOp Hi-Hat Cymbal Open (9) HI-HAT Hitting the bow section of the cymbal pad when it is not closed by the hi-hat controller.

hhEgOp Hi-Hat Cymbal Edge Open (9) HI-HAT Hitting the edge section of the cymbal pad when it is not closed by the hi-hat controller.

hhBwCl Hi-Hat Cymbal Close (9) HI-HAT Hitting the bow section of the cymbal pad when it is closed by the hi-hat con- troller.

hhEgCl Hi-Hat Cymbal Edge Close (9) HI-HAT Hitting the edge section of the cymbal pad when it is closed by the hi-hat controller.

hhFtCl Hi-Hat Cymbal Foot Close (9) HI-HAT Pressing and holding the hi-hat controller by your foot.

hhSplsh Hi-Hat Cymbal Foot Splash (9) HI-HAT Pressing and immediately releasing the hi-hat controller.

kick Kick (10) KICK Pressing the kick pad by your foot.

pad11 Pad 11 (11) PAD11 Hitting the snare pad or tom pad.

pad12Hd Pad 12 Head (12) PAD12 Hitting the head section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

pad12Rm1 Pad 12 Rim 1 (12) PAD12 Hitting the rim 1 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

pad12Rm2 Pad 12 Rim 2 (12) PAD12 Hitting the rim 2 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

: : : :

pad15Hd Pad 15 Head (12) PAD15 Hitting the head section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

pad15Rm1 Pad 15 Rim 1 (12) PAD15 Hitting the rim 1 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

pad15Rm2 Pad 15 Rim 2 (12) PAD15 Hitting the rim 2 section of the tom pad (e.g., XP120T).

DTX900 Owners Manual 61

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

Tone Generator Block (Drum Kits and Drum Voices)

The tone generator block is the section of the DTX900 which plays the Drum Voice assigned to the Trigger Input Source which transmits the trigger signal. Assigning each of Drum Voices to each of the Trigger Input Sources makes up a Drum Kit. A total of 50 Preset Drum Kits are provided in the DTX900. Drum Kits can be edited or created as desired and then stored to up to 50 User Drum Kit locations in internal memory, or stored to a maximum 1584 External Drum Kits (16 Banks x 99 kits = 1584 kits) in an external USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. The DTX900 is a comprehensive sound source in it own right just with the built-in Preset Drum Kits; however, you get even more out of the instrument by understanding the internal structure and creating your own original Drum Kits.

Drum Voices assigned to each of the Trigger Input Sources

You can create your own original Drum Kit by assigning the desired Drum Voice to each of the Trigger Input Sources coming from the pad. For instructions, see page 61.

Convenient Voice Set assignment for each Trigger Input jack

Assign Drum Voices to each of the Trigger Input Sources may be time-consuming and even tedious, difcult work. This is why the DTX900 provides the Voice Set parameter. Simply by selecting a value of the Voice Set parameter, you can assign the Drum Voices to all the Trigger Input Sources corre- sponding to the respective Trigger Input jacks. For instructions, see page 79.

Assigning a Drum Voice to each of the Trigger Input Sources

A: Assigning a Drum Voice to Trigger Input Source A.

B: Assigning a Drum Voice to Trigger Input Source B.

C:Assigning a Drum Voice to Trigger Input Source C.

Assigning a Voice Set to each of the Trigger Input jacks

Assigning a Drum Voice to each of three Trigger Input Sources by assigning the Voice Set to the Trigger Input jack.

62 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Drum Kits consisting of Voice Sets (Drum Voices)

For many players and composers, the Preset Drum Kits have all the sound variations you need. How- ever, if youre looking for something different or want to customize the Kits, you change the sound by making Voice Set assignments for each of the Trigger Input jacks and create your original Drum Kit. If you want to go even further, you change the sound and create a Drum Kit by assigning Drum Voices to each of the Trigger Input Sources.

Mono Pad

3-zone pad

3-zone pad

2-zone pad

Trigger Input Source

Trigger signal

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Drum Voice

Voice Set

Voice Set

Voice Set

Voice Set

Drum Kit

For each Trigger Input Source (For each SOURCE)

For each Trigger Input jack (For each INPUT)

[DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF1] SELECT

[DRUM KIT] [F1] PLAY

Drum Voice

DTX900 Owners Manual 63

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

Drum Voices and MIDI note numbers

One important thing to understand is that separate Drum Voices are assigned to MIDI note numbers when using the Stack/Alternate function (page 86). While you may not need to pay attention to MIDI note numbers when using other functions, using the Stack/Alternate function requires that you set the MIDI note number instead of the Drum Voice. For the currently selected Drum Kit, you can conrm which Drum Voice is assigned to each MIDI note number in the display called up by pressing the [DRUM KIT] , [F2] VOICE, [SF1] SELECT buttons in order, setting the SOURCE to MIDI, then selecting a MIDI note number on the NOTE NO column. From this display, you can change the Drum Voice assigned to the MIDI note number, meaning that you can change the Drum Voice assigned to the Trigger Input Source (pad).

In the examples above, the Trigger Input Sources and Drum Voices listed below are assigned to the MIDI note numbers C1, C3 and C5 respectively.

MIDI note number Trigger Input Source Drum Voice

C1 Head section of the XP120SD Head shot sound of the snare drum

C3 Edge section of the RHH135 Edge shot sound of the hi-hat cymbal

C5 KP125W Kick sound of the bass drum

C0

240

C1

36

C2

48

C3

60

C4

72

C5 C6 C7

84 96 108 127

Trigger Input Source

XP120SD RHH135 KP125W

Drum Voice

Head Shot sound Hi-hat Edge Shot sound

Bass Drum Kick sound

MIDI Note Number

64 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Sampling

The Sampling function lets you record audio signals such as vocals and CD playback sound to the DTX900 and play those sounds by hitting the drum pads. Recording audio signals to the DTX900 is referred to as sampling. In addition to being able to record audio signals directly to the DTX900, you can also import existing audio data (in WAV or AIFF le format) in the File mode. This lets you use audio youve recorded and edited on computer with the DTX900. Once youve recorded or loaded the audio, youll need to assign it to a User Voice which can be selected in the Drum Kit mode.

The User Voices created in the Sampling mode reside temporarily in the optionally installed DIMMs (pages 76 and 147). Because data contained in DIMM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always save the User Voices created by recording, editing, and using Jobs to a USB storage device before turning off the power. For information on how to save, see pages 54 and 114.

NOTICE

Sampling source

USB storage device

AIFF, WAV le, etc.

Microphone, etc. CD, MD, etc.

User Voice Specied before the Sampling is started in the display called up via [SAMPLING] [F1] SELECT.

or Specied before the Load is executed in the display called up via [FILE] [F2] LOAD.

DIMM (sold separately) Max. 512MB

USB storage device

File type = AllData, AllVoice, Wav, Aiff

Sampling Performed in the Sampling mode

Load Performed in the File mode

(File type = Wave )

Destination to which the recorded audio signal is assigned

Save/Load Performed in the File mode

Pad (Trigger Input Source) Specied after Sampling is completed (Sampling mode).

or Specied in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF1] SELECT.

DTX900 Owners Manual 65

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

Trigger mode

[SAMPLING] [F6] REC Trigger Mode The Trigger mode is a convenient feature in Sampling that lets you determine how recording is startedmanually or automatically, based on the audio level.

Starting recording manually [SAMPLING] [F6] REC Trigger Mode = manual Regardless of the audio input signal level, sampling starts soon after you press the [F6] START button in the Sampling Standby display.

Starting recording when the input signal exceeds the Trigger Level [SAMPLING] [F6] REC Trigger Mode = level After pressing the [F6] START button in the Sampling Standby display, sampling starts as soon as a strong enough audio signal is received. The threshold for this audio-triggered start is called the Trigger Level (explained in the illustration below).

As you can see, the higher the Trigger Level setting, the louder the input audio needs to be in order to start sampling. On the other hand, if the Trigger Level is set too low, a soft noise may be enough to inadvertently start sampling.

A B C D E

A B C D E

Sample recording starts here. Level

Sample recording starts here.

Recording trigger level

Level

Recording trigger level

66 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Song

A song consists of two sequence tracks (Tracks 1 and 2) and header data. Each of two sequence tracks contains MIDI sequence data of 16 MIDI channels (channel 1 16). The DRUM, BASS and OTHER parts correspond to MIDI channels 10, 3, and the other channels respectively. These parts can be muted, regardless of which tracks they are on, by pressing the [SF1], [SF2] and [SF3] buttons. The header data at the beginning of the song contains general song information such as Drum Kit number, tempo and time signature (BEAT), as well as program change and volume data for each MIDI channel. These types of data are automatically transmitted to the tone generator block when you select a song. When song playback is started, this data is transmitted to the tone generator block for the sounds to be played back.

Playback of each Song can be started by hitting the specied pad as well as pressing the [>/] (Start/Stop) button. The func- tion that lets you start/stop playback of a Song by hitting the specied pad is referred to as Pad Song (Page 93). Each Drum Kit can feature up to four Trigger Input Sources to which a Pad Song is assigned. Some Preset Drum Kits provide special Pad Song settings. Since the DTX900 can play one main Song (normally started via the [>/] button) and up to four Pad Songs at a time, you can play short phrases, such as a guitar riff or a chorded brass hit by hitting pads while playing the drum kit along with the main Song. The Pad Song settings for each Drum Kit can be performed in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF3] PADSONG.

NOTE All the Preset Songs are recorded to the track 1.

NOTE Even if the [SF1] DRUM button is turned off, the drum part of only track 1

can be muted.

Song

Track 1 Track 2

DRUM MIDI channel 10

BASS MIDI channel 3

OTHER MIDI channels 1, 2, 4-9, 11-16

DTX900 Owners Manual 67

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

Effects

This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block, processing and enhancing the sound using sophisticated DSP (digital signal processing) technology. Effects are applied in the nal stages of editing, letting you change the sound as desired.

Effect Structure

The Effects of the DTX900 consist of the following blocks.

Reverb The Reverb effects add a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reections of actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. The Effect type of the Reverb block can be selected for each Drum Kit in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F4] EFFECT [SF1] CON- NECT or [SF3] REVERB. The Effect of this block is applied to the overall sound of the DTX900.

Chorus The Chorus effects use various types of modulation processing, including anger and phaser, to enhance the sound in a variety of ways. The Effect type of the Chorus block can be selected for each Drum Kit in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F4] EFFECT [SF1] CONNECT or [SF4] CHORUS. The Effect of this block is applied to the overall sound of the DTX900.

Variation The Effects of this block is applied only to the current Drum Kit sound. The Effect type of the Variation block can be selected for each Drum Kit in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F4] EFFECT [SF1] CONNECT or [SF2] VAR.

Insertion A and Insertion B The Effects of these two blocks is applied only to the audio signal coming from the external audio device or microphone. The Effect type for each of Insertion A and B can be selected in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F4] AUX IN [SF3] INS A and [SF4] INS B respectively.

Master Effect This block applies effects to the nal stereo output signal of the entire sound. The Master Effect type can be selected in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F3] EFFECT [SF2] MEF.

Master EQ Master EQ is applied to the nal, overall (post-effect) sound of the instrument. The Master EQ can be set in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F3] EFFECT [SF1] MEQ.

NOTE For detailed information about the Effect Types and related parameters,

refer to pages 70 and 72 respectively. For a complete list of the available Effect Types for each Effect block, refer to the Effect Type List in the sepa- rate Data List booklet.

68 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Effect Connection

Insertion Effect A

Insertion Effect B

Insertion Effect A

Insertion Effect B

or

[UTILITY] [F4] AUX IN [SF2] INS TYPE

External Audio signal via

AUX IN/ SAMPLING IN

Drum Voice (MIDI channel 10)

Other Voices (Other than

MIDI channel 10)

Master Effect

Master EQ

Click Voice

Variation*1

Variation Return*1

Variation Send*2

Chorus*1

Reverb*1

Reverb Send*2

Chorus Send*2

Reverb Return*1

Chorus Return*1

Reverb Return*1

Chorus Return*1

Chorus to Reverb*1

Reverb Send*2

Chorus Send*2

*1 [DRUM KIT] [F4] EFFECT [SF1] CONNECT *2 [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT-TUNE

[UTILITY] [F3] EFFECT [SF2] MEF

[UTILITY] [F3] EFFECT [SF1] MEQ

Variation to Reverb*1

Variation to Chorus*1

DTX900 Owners Manual 69

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

The DTX900 provides such a wide and extensive variety of Effect types that it may be difcult to nd the desired Effect type out of the great number that are available. This is why all the Effect types are divided into convenient Effect categories. This section explains the Effect categories and their types. The Effect Type list described below for each category con- tains the columns: REV (Reverb), CHO (Chorus), VAR (Variation), INS (Insertion) and MEF (Master Effect). The checkmarks indicated in these columns means the Effect Type is available for each block. These Effect types (with the checkmarks indicated in each list) can be selected from the panel controls.

COMPRESSOR & EQ

Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and com- press the dynamics (softness/loudness) of an audio signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as vocals and guitar parts, it squeezes the dynamic range, effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound. Compression can be used to increase sustain for electric guitar, smooth out the volume of a vocal, or bring a drum kit or rhythm pattern further up-front in the mix.

LO-FI

This effect intentionally degrades the audio quality of the input signal via several methods, including lowering of the sampling frequency.

FLANGER & PHASER

The anger creates a swirling, metallic sound. The phaser modulates cyclically to add movement and animation to the sound.

DISTORTION

This effect type is used mainly for guitar, adding distortion with an edge to the sound.

WAH

This effect cyclically modulates the tone brightness (cutoff frequency of a lter). Auto Wah modulates the tone via LFO, Touch Wah modulates the tone via volume (note-on velocity) and Pedal Wah modulates the tone the pedal con- trol.

Effect Types and Effect Categories

Effect Type VAR INS MEF Description

COMPRES- SOR

Vintage sounding compres- sion.

CLASSIC COMPRES- SOR

Conventional type of com- pressor.

MULTI BAND COMP 3-band type compressor.

EQ Vintage 5-band parametric EQ.

HARMONIC ENHANCER

Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.

Effect Type VAR INS MEF Description

LO-FI Degrades the audio quality of the input signal for a lo- sound.

NOISY Adds noise to the current sound.

DIGITAL TURNTABLE

Simulates the noise, scratches and pops of a vinyl record.

Effect Type VAR INS CHO Description

FLANGER Vintage sounding anger.

CLASSIC FLANGER Conventional type of anger.

TEMPO FLANGER Tempo-synchronized anger.

DYNAMIC FLANGER Dynamically controlled

anger.

PHASER MONO

Vintage sounding mono phaser.

PHASER STEREO

Vintage sounding stereo phaser.

TEMPO PHASER Tempo-synchronized phaser.

DYNAMIC PHASER Dynamically controlled phase

shifter.

Effect Type VAR INS MEF Description

AMP SIMULATOR 1 Simulation of a guitar amp.

AMP SIMULATOR 2 Simulation of a guitar amp.

COMP DISTORTION

Since compression is included in the rst stage, steady distortion can be pro- duced regardless of changes in input level.

COMP DISTORTION DELAY

Compressor, Distortion and Delay effects are connected in series.

Effect Type VAR INS Description

AUTO WAH Modulates the tone via LFO.

TOUCH WAH Modulates the tone via volume (note-on velocity).

70 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

REVERB

Also called reverberation, this refers to the sound energy remaining in a room or closed space after the original sound stops. Similar to yet different from echo, reverb is the indirect, diffuse sound of reections from the walls and ceiling that accompany the direct sound. The characteris- tics of this indirect sound depends on the size of the room or space and the materials and furnishings in the room. Reverb Effect types use digital signal processing to simu- late these characteristics.

CHORUS

Depending on the particular chorus type and parameters, this can make a voice sound larger, as if several identical instruments were playing in unison, or it can give a voice greater warmth and depth.

TREMOLO & ROTARY

The tremolo effect cyclically modulates the volume. The Rotary Speaker effect simulates the characteristic vibrato effect of a rotary speaker.

DELAY

An effect (or device) that delays an audio signal for ambi- ent or rhythmic effects.

Effect Type VAR INS REV CHO Description

REV-X HALL

Reverb emulating the acoustics of a concert hall using REV-X tech- nology.

R3 HALL

Reverb emulating the acoustics of a concert hall using an algorithm derived from the Yamaha ProR3.

SPX HALL

Reverb emulating the acoustics of a concert hall derived from the Yamaha SPX1000.

REV-X ROOM

Reverb emulating the acoustics of a room using the REV-X tech- nology.

R3 ROOM

Reverb emulating the acoustics of a room using an algorithm derived from the Yamaha ProR3.

SPX ROOM

Reverb emulating the acoustics of a room derived from the Yamaha SPX1000.

R3 PLATE

Reverb emulating a metal plate using an algorithm derived from the Yamaha ProR3.

SPX STAGE

Reverb designed for enhancing solo instru- ments, derived from the Yamaha SPX1000.

SPACE SIMULATOR

Reverb which lets you set the space size by specifying the width, height, and depth.

EARLY REFLECTION

This effect isolates only the early reection com- ponents of the reverb.

Effect Type VAR INS CHO Description

G CHORUS

This chorus effect produces a richer and more complex mod- ulation than conventional cho- rus.

2 MODULA- TOR

This chorus effect consists of pitch modulation and ampli- tude modulation.

SPX CHORUS This effect uses a 3-phase LFO to add modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

SYMPHONIC A multi-stage version of SPX CHORUS modulation.

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

Chorus effect without modula- tion, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.

Effect Type VAR INS Description

AUTO PAN Cyclically moves the sound left/right and front/back.

TREMOLO Cyclically modulates the volume.

ROTARY SPEAKER Simulation of a rotary speaker.

Effect Type CHO VAR INS MEF Description

CROSS DELAY The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed.

TEMPO CROSS DELAY Cross delay synchro-

nized with the tempo.

TEMPO DELAY MONO Mono delay synchro-

nized with the tempo.

TEMPO DELAY STEREO Mono delay synchro-

nized with the tempo.

CONTROL DELAY

Delay with delay time controllable in real time.

DELAY LR Produces two delayed sounds: L and R.

DELAY LCR Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center).

DELAY LR (Stereo)

Produces two delayed sounds in stereo: L and R.

DTX900 Owners Manual 71

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

TECH

This effect radically changes the tonal characteristics by using a lter and modulation.

MISC

This category includes effect types not included in the other categories.

REV-X is a reverb algorithm developed by Yamaha. It pro- vides high-density, richly reverberant sound quality, with smooth attenuation, spread and depth that work together to enhance the original sound. The DTX900 features two types of REV-X effects: REV-X Hall and REV-X Room.

Each of the Effect Types has parameters that determine how the Effect is applied to the sound. A variety of sounds can be obtained from a single effect type by setting these parameters. For information about the Effect parameters, see below.

Preset settings for Effect parameters

Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are pro- vided as templates and can be selected in the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try rst selecting one of the Presets close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary.

Effect parameters

Effect Type VAR INS MEF Description

RING MODULATOR

An effect that modies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the frequency of the input.

DYNAMIC RING MODULATOR

Dynamically controlled ring modulation.

DYNAMIC FILTER Dynamically controlled lter.

AUTO SYNTH Processes the input signal into a synthesizer-type sound.

ISOLATOR Controls the level of a speci- ed frequency band of the input signal.

SLICE Cuts the Voice sound into sep- arate segments for special rhythmic effects.

TECH MODU- LATION

Adds a unique feeling of mod- ulation similar to ring modula- tion.

Effect Type VAR INS Description

TALKING MODULATOR

Adds a vowel sound to the input sig- nal.

PITCH CHANGE

Changes the pitch of the input sig- nal.

REV-X

Effect Parameters

NOTE Some parameters below may appear in different effect types with the

same name, but actually have different functions depending on the partic- ular effect type. For these parameters, two or three types of explanations are given.

Paramater name Descriptions

AEGPhs Offsets the phase of the AEG.

AMDepth Determines the depth of the amplitude modulation.

AMInvR Determines the phase of the amplitude modulation for the R channel.

AmpType Selects the amplier type to be simulated.

AMSpeed Determines the amplitude modulation speed.

AMWave Determines the wave of the amplitude modulation.

Analog Adds the characteristics of an analog anger to the sound.

AtkOfst Determines the amount of time that elapses between the hitting of a pad (or playing of a key) and the start of the wah effect.

AtkTime Determines the attack time of the envelope follower.

Attack Determines the amount of time that elapses between the hitting of a pad (or playing of a key) and the start of the compressor effect.

BitAsgn Determines the degree to which the Word Length is applied to the sound, and affects the resolution of the sound.

Bottom*1 Determines the minimum value of the wah lter.

ClickDensity Determines the frequency at which the click sounds.

ClickLvl Determines the click level.

Color*2 Determines the xed phase modulation.

CommonRel This is one of the Multi Band Comp parameters and determines the amount of time that elapses between the releasing of a note and the end of the effect.

Compres Determines the minimum input level at which the compressor effect is applied.

CtrType

This one of the Control Delay parameters. When set to Normal, the delay effect is always applied to the sound. When set to Scratch, the delay effect is not applied if both the Delay Time and Delay Time Offset are set to 0.

Decay Controls how the reverb sound decays.

Delay

[For TEMPO DELAY MONO, TEMPO DELAY STE- REO] Determines the delay of the sound in note value. This helps in setting rhythmic delays that match the timing of the music. [For TEC effects, CONTROL DELAY] Determines the delay time.

72 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

DelayC Determines the delay time for the center channel.

DelayL Determines the delay time for the L channel.

DelayL>R Determines the amount of time between the moment the sound is input from the L channel and the moment the sound is output to the R channel.

DelayOfstR Determines the delay time for the R channel as off- set.

DelayR Determines the delay time for the R channel.

DelayR>L Determines the amount of time between the moment the sound is input from the R channel and the moment the sound is output to the L channel.

Density

[For REVERB effects, except EARLY REFLECTION] Determines the density of the reverberations. [For EARLY REFLECTION] Determines the density of the reections.

Depth

[For FLANGER] Determines the amplitude of the LFO wave which controls the cyclic change of the delay modulation. [For PHASER MONO, PHASER STEREO] Determines the amplitude of the LFO wave which controls the cyclic change of the phase modulation. [For SPACE SIMULATOR] Determines the depth of the simulated room.

Detune Determines the amount of detuning of the pitch.

Device Selects the device for changing how the sound is to be distorted.

Diffuse

[For TEMPO PHASER, EARLY REFLECTION] Determines the spread of the selected effect. [For REVERB effects, except EARLY REFLECTION] Determines the spread of the reverb.

Directn Determines the direction of the modulation controlled by the envelope follower.

Div.Lvl Determines the minimum level of the portions extracted via the slice effect.

DivFreqH Determines the high frequency for dividing the entire sound into three bands.

DivFreqL Determines the low frequency for dividing the entire sound into three bands.

DivideType Determines how the sound (wave) is sliced by the note length. This helps in setting rhythmic effects that match the timing of the music.

DlyLvl Determines the level of the delayed sound.

DlyLvlC Determines the level of the delayed sound for the center channel.

DlyMix Determines the mixing level of the delayed sound.

DlyOfst Determines the offset value of the delay modulation.

DlyTrnsit Determines the speed (rate) at which the delay time is changed from the current value to the specied new value.

Drive

[For HARMONIC ENHANCER, TALKING MODULA- TOR] Determines the extent to which the enhancer or talk- ing modulator is applied. [For NOISY, SLICE] Determines the degree and character of the distor- tion effect.

DriveHorn Determines the depth of the modulation generated via the rotation of the horn.

DriveRotor Determines the depth of the modulation generated via the rotation of the rotor.

Dry/Wet Determines the balance of the dry sound and effect sound.

DryLPF Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass lter applied to the dry sound.

DryLvl Determines the level of the dry sound (the unproc- essed sound).

DryMixLvl Determines the level of the dry sound (the unproc- essed sound).

DrySndNoise Determines the level of the dry signal sent to the noise effect.

Paramater name Descriptions

DyLvlOfs Determines the offset value added to the output from the envelope follower.

DyThreshLvl Determines the minimum level at which the envelope. follower starts.

Edge Sets the curve that determines how the sound is dis- torted.

Emphasi Determines the change of the characteristics in high frequencies.

EQ1Freq Determines the Cutoff frequency of EQ1 (Low Shelv- ing).

EQ1Gain Determines the level gain of EQ 1 (Low Shelving).

EQ2Freq Determines the center frequency of EQ2.

EQ2Gain Determines the level gain of EQ2.

EQ2Q Determines the Q of EQ2.

EQ3Freq Determines the center frequency of EQ3.

EQ3Gain Determines the level gain of EQ3.

EQ3Q Determines the Q of EQ3.

EQ4Freq Determines the center frequency of EQ4.

EQ4Gain Determines the level gain of EQ4.

EQ4Q Determines the Q of EQ4.

EQ5Freq Determines the Cutoff frequency of EQ5 (High Shelving).

EQ5Gain Determines the level gain of EQ5 (High Shelving).

EQFreq Determines the center frequency for each band of the EQ.

EQGain Determines the level gain of the EQ center frequency for each band.

EQWidth Determines the width of the EQ band.

ER/Rev Determines the level balance of the early reection and reverb sound.

F/RDpth This Auto Pan parameter (available when PAN Direc- tion is set to L turn and R turn) determines the depth of the F/R (front/rear) pan.

FBHiDmp Determines how the high frequencies of the feedback sound decay.

FBHiDmR Determines the amount of decay in high frequencies for the R channel as offset.

FBLevel

[For CHORUS effects, DELAY effects, TECH effects, CLASSIC FLANGER, TEMPO FLANGER, DYNAMIC FLANGER, COMP DISTORTION DELAY] Determines the feedback level output from the delay and returned to the input. [For TEMPO PHASER, DYNAMIC PHASER] Determines the feedback level output from the delay and returned to the input. [For REVERB effects] Determines the feedback level of the initial delay.

FBLvl1 Determines the feedback level of the delayed sound in the 1st series.

FBLvl2 Determines the feedback level of the delayed sound in the 2nd series.

FBLvlR Determines the feedback level for the R channel as offset.

FBTime Determines the delay time of the feedback.

FBTime1 Determines the delay time of feedback 1.

FBTime2 Determines the delay time of feedback 2.

FBTimeL Determines the delay time of the feedback for the left channel.

FBTimeR Determines the delay time of the feedback for the right channel.

Feedback Determines the level of the sound signal output from the effect block and returned to its own input.

Fine1 Determines the ne pitch setting for the 1st series.

Fine2 Determines the ne pitch setting for the 2nd series.

FltType

[For LO-FI] Determines the type of tonal characteristics. [For DYNAMIC FILTER] Determines the lter type.

Paramater name Descriptions

DTX900 Owners Manual 73

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

GateTime Determines the gate time of the sliced portion.

H.Freq Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted.

H.Gain Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high EQ band.

Height Determines the height of the simulated room.

HiAtk Determines the amount of time from the moment a note is played to the moment the compressor is applied to the high frequencies.

HiGain Determines the output gain for the high frequencies.

HiLvl Determines the level of the high frequencies.

HiMute Switches the mute status of the high frequencies.

HiRat [For MULTI BAND COMP] Determines the ratio of the compressor for the high frequencies.

HiRat [For REVERB effects] Adjusts the resonance of the high frequencies.

HiTh Determines the minimum input level at which the effect is applied to the high frequencies.

HornF Determines the speed of the horn when the slow/fast switch is set to fast.

HornS Determines the speed of the horn when the slow/fast switch is set to slow.

HPF Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter.

InitDly Determines the amount of time that elapses between the direct, original sound and the initial reections.

InitDly1 Determines the delay time for the 1st series.

InitDly2 Determines the delay time for the 2nd series.

InitDlyL Determines the delay time of the left channel.

InitDlyR Determines the delay time of the right channel.

InpLvl Determines the input level.

InpMode Selects mono or stereo conguration for the input sound.

InpSelect Selects an input.

L.Freq Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted.

L.Gain Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low EQ band.

L/RDiffuse Determines the spread of the sound.

L/RDpth Determines the depth of the L/R pan effect.

Lag

Determines the lagging time additionally applied to the delayed sound, and is specied via a note length. This helps in setting rhythmic effects that match the timing of the music.

LFODpth

[For CHORUS effects, RING MODULATOR, CLAS- SIC FLANGER, TEMPO FLANGER] Determines the depth of the modulation. [For TEMPO PHASER] Determines the depth of the phase modulation.

LFOPhDiff Determines the L/R phase difference of the modu- lated wave.

LFOPhRst Determines how the initial phase of the LFO is reset.

LFOSpeed

[For CHORUS effects, TREMOLO, RING MODULA- TOR, CLASSIC FLANGER, TEMPO FLANGER] Determines the frequency of the modulation. [For TEMPO PHASER] Determines the modulation speed via a note length. This helps in setting rhythmic effects that match the timing of the music. [For AUTO PAN] Determines the frequency of the Auto Pan.

LFOWave

[For CLASSIC FLANGER, RING MODULATOR] Selects the wave for modulation. [For AUTO WAH] Selects the wave, sine or square. [For AUTO PAN] Determines the panning curve.

Paramater name Descriptions

Livenss Determines the decay characteristics of Early Reec- tion.

LowAtk Determines the amount of time from the moment a note is pressed to the moment the compressor is applied to the low frequencies.

LowGain Determines the output gain for the low frequencies.

LowLvl Determines the output level for the low frequencies.

LowMute Determines whether the low frequency band is off or on.

LowRat [For MULTI BAND COMP] Determines the ratio of the compressor for the low frequencies.

LowRat [For REVERB effects] Determines the ratio of the low frequencies.

LowTh Determines the minimum input level at which the effect is applied to the low frequencies.

LPF Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass lter.

LPFReso Determines the Resonance of the Low Pass Filter for the input sound.

M.Freq Determines the center frequency of the middle EQ band that is attenuated/boosted.

M.Gain Determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the middle EQ band.

M.Width Determines the width of the middle EQ band.

Manual

[For FLANGER] Determines the offset value of the delay modulation. [For PHASER MONO, PHASER STEREO] Determines the offset value of the phase modulation.

MicAngl Determines the L/R angle of the microphone.

MidAtk Determines the amount of time from the moment a note is pressed to the moment the compressor is applied to the mid frequencies.

MidGain Determines the output gain for the mid frequencies.

MidLvl Determines the output level for the mid frequencies.

MidMute Switches the mute status of the mid frequencies.

MidRat Determines the ratio of the compressor for the mid frequencies.

MidTh Determines the minimum input level at which the effect is applied for the mid frequencies.

Mix Determines the volume of the effect sound.

MixLvl Determines the level of the effect sound mixed to the dry sound.

ModDpth Determines the depth of the modulation.

ModDptR Determines the depth of the modulation for the right channel as offset.

Mode Determines the phaser type, or more specically, the factor for forming the phaser effect.

ModFB Determines the feedback level to the modulation.

ModGain Determines the gain of the modulation.

ModLPF Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass lter applied to the modulated sound.

ModLPFReso Determines the resonance of the low pass lter for the modulated sound.

ModMix Determines the mix balance of the modulated ele- ment.

ModPh Determines the L/R phase difference of the modu- lated wave.

ModSpd Determines the modulation speed.

ModWave Selects the wave type for modulation.

MoveSpeed Determines how long it takes to move the sound from the current status to the sound specied via the Vowel parameter.

NoiseQ Determines the resonance of the low pass lter applied to the noise.

NoisLPF Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass lter applied to the noise.

NoisLvl Determines the noise level.

Paramater name Descriptions

74 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

*1 The Bottom parameter is available only when the value is less than that of the Top parameter.

*2 The Color parameter may not be effective depending on the values of the Mode and Stage parameters.

*3 The Top parameter is available only when the value is more than that of the Bottom parameter.

NoisModDpt Determines the depth of the noise modulation.

NoisModSpd Determines the speed of the noise modulation.

NoisTon Determines the characteristics of the noise.

On/Off Turns the isolator on or off.

OSCFrqCors Determines the frequency for modulating the input wave.

OSCFrqFine Finely determines the frequency for modulating the input wave.

OutGain Determines the level gain.

OutLvl Determines the output level.

OutLvl1 Determines the output level for the 1st series.

OutLvl2 Determines the output level for the 2nd series.

Output Determines the output level.

OverDr Determines the degree and character of the distor- tion effect.

Pan1 Determines the pan position for the 1st series.

Pan2 Determines the pan position for the 2nd series.

PanAEGLvl This parameter of the Slice effect determines the minimum level of the AEG applied to the panned sound.

PanAEGType This parameter of the Slice effect determines the type of the AEG applied to the panned sound

PanDirectn Determines the type of the Auto Pan.

PanDpth Determines the depth of the pan effect.

PanType Determines the pan type.

PhShiftOfst Determines the offset value of the phase modulation.

Pitch1 Determines the pitch in semitones for the 1st series.

Pitch2 Determines the pitch in semitones for the 2nd series.

PMDepth Determines the depth of the pitch modulation.

Pre-LPF Determines the Cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Fil- ter before the modulation.

PreLPFReso Determines the Resonance of the Low Pass Filter for the input sound.

PreModHPF Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter before the modulation.

Presenc This guitar amp effect parameter controls the high frequencies.

Ratio Determines the ratio of the compressor.

RelCurv Determines the release curve of the envelope fol- lower.

Release Determines the amount of time that elapses between the release or end of a sound and the end of the compressor effect.

RelTime Determines the release time of the envelope follower.

Reso Determines the resonance of the lter.

ResoOfst Determines the resonance as offset.

RevDly Determines the delay time from the early reections until the reverberations.

RevTime Determines the reverb time.

RoomSize Determines the room capacity.

Rotor/Horn Determines the volume balance of the horn and rotor.

RotorF Determines the speed of the rotor when the slow/fast switch is set to fast.

RotorS Determines the speed of the rotor when the slow/fast switch is set to slow.

Sens

[For FLANGER&PHASER effects, TECH effects] Determines the sensitivity of the modulation applied to the input change. [For TOUCH WAH] Determines the sensitivity of the wah lters change applied to the input change.

S-FTmHorn

Determines how long it takes for the rotation speed of the horn to change from the current speed (slow or fast) to another speed (fast or slow) when the rotation speed is switched.

Paramater name Descriptions

S-FTmRotor

Determines how long it takes for the rotation speed of the rotor to change from the current speed (slow or fast) to the another speed (fast or slow) when the rotation speed is switched.

SmplFrqCtr Controls the sampling frequency.

SpcType Selects the type of space simulation.

Speaker Selects the type of speaker simulation.

Speed

[For FLANGER] Determines the frequency of the LFO wave which controls the cyclic change of the delay modulation. [For PHASER MONO, PHASER STEREO] Determines the frequency of the LFO wave which controls the cyclic change of the phase modulation. [For AUTO WAH] Determines the speed of the LFO.

SpeedCtrl Switches the rotary speed.

Spread Determines the spread of the sound.

Stage Determines the step number of the phase shifter.

Thresh Determines the minimum input level at which the effect is applied.

Top*3 Determines the maximum value of the wah lter.

Type

[For FLANGER] Determines the type of anger. [For WAH effects] Determines the type of Wah. [For EARLY REFLECTION] Determines the type of the reection sound.

Vowel Selects a vowel type.

WallVary Determines the wall status of the simulated room. Higher settings produces more diffuse reections.

Width Determines the width of the simulated room.

WordLen Determines the resolution of the sound, or how rough the sound is.

Paramater name Descriptions

DTX900 Owners Manual 75

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

Internal Memory and File Management

As you use the DTX900, youll create many different kinds of data, including Drum Kits, Drum Voices, Songs and Chain programs. This section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing them.

The chart below lists the data types you can create on the instrument and the internal memory locations to which they are stored, permanently or temporarily. Keep in mind that certain types of data are lost when you turn off the power and you should always prepare a USB storage device for use BEFORE you start creating or editing data.

Below are explanations of the basic terms used in the Memory Structure illustration on the next page.

Flash ROM ROM (Read Only Memory) is memory designed speci- cally for reading out data, and as such data cannot be writ- ten to it. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten allowing you to store your own original data. The contents of Flash ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off.

DRAM RAM (Random Access Memory) is memory designed spe- cically for data writing and data reading operations. There are two different kinds of RAM, depending on the condi- tion for storing the data: SRAM (Static RAM) and DRAM (Dynamic RAM). The created data stored on DRAM is lost when the power is turned off. Because of this, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to the USB stor- age device before turning off the power.

DIMM (sold separately) DIMM modules must be installed in order for using the Sampling function or for loading audio data (User Voice/ WAV le/AIFF le) to the instrument. As with DRAM described above, the created data stored on DIMM is lost when the power is turned off. Because of this, you should always store any data residing in DIMM to the USB stor- age device before turning off the power.

User Memory The internal memory to which all the data you have created can be stored, permanently or temporarily is referred to as User Memory. Among various types of data created on the DTX900, data stored on Flash ROM can be maintained even if you turn the power off. On the other hand, data on DRAM (User Song) and DIMM (User Voice) should be saved to the USB storage device before turning the power off because these types of data will be lost when you turn the power off.

Data Lost and Retained When Power is Turned Off

Data types Internal memory types to which

data is stored

Drum Kit Flash ROM

Click settings Flash ROM

Trigger Setups Flash ROM

Utility settings Flash ROM

Chain Flash ROM

User Song DRAM Will be lost when turning the power off!

User Voice DIMM Will be lost when turning the power off!

Among the data types above, the User Song and User Voice data should be saved to a USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector before turning the power off. Otherwise, the cre- ated data will be lost.

NOTICE

Internal Memory

76 DTX900 Owners Manual

Basic Structure of the DTX900

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

This diagram details the relationship among the functions of the DTX900 and the internal memory and USB storage device.

* External Drum Kits stored in the root directory of the USB storage device can be called up directly in the Drum Kit mode without the Load operation in the File mode. The le (Exten- sion:.T3E) will be created automatically when storing the drum kit to an external bank. Do not change the le name.

** Standard MIDI le Songs (format 0) saved in the root directory of the USB storage device can be called up directly in the Song mode and played back. This type of Songs can be loaded in the File mode with the File type Song as a User Song.

Memory Structure

Drum Kit Voice Song Trigger Setup

Preset data (ROM)

Internal Memory

User Memory

Flash ROM

DRAM

DIMM

Data Creation function

User Drum Kit 1 50

Click settings

User Trigger Setups 1 5

Utility settings

Chains 1 64

File extensions: .wav (File type = Wav)

User Song 1 50

File extensions: .aif (File type = Aiff)

Standard MIDI le (SMF Format = 0)**

File extensions: .T3V (File type = AllVoice)

File extensions: .T3S (File type = AllSong)

File extensions: .T3H (File type = AllChain)

File extensions: .T3U (File type = Utility)

File extensions: .T3A (File type = AllData)

File extensions: .T3T (File type = AllTrigger)

File extensions: .T3C (File type = Click)

File extensions: .T3K (File type = AllKit)

External Drum Kit* EXT-A 01 99 EXT-B 01 99

: EXT-P 01 99

L o

ad /S

av e

S to

re

User Voice USR-A: 001 127 USR-B: 001 127

: USR-H: 001 127

Drum Kit Edit

Click settings

Trigger Setup

Utility settings

Chain Edit

Song Record

Sampling

External USB storage device

DTX900 Owners Manual 77

Reference

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

This chapter explains the Drum Kit mode called up via the [DRUM KIT] button. In the Drum Kit mode, you can select and play the desired Drum Kit from 50 Preset Drum Kits (PRE: 01 to 50), with another 50 User Drum Kits (USR: 01 to 50) available for editing and creating your own kits. In addition, you can create and store original kits to the 1584 External Drum Kits (EXT-A: 01 99 EXT-P: 01 99) by using an external USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. These Drum Kits can be called up directly, even though they are stored to an external device.

Basic Procedure in the Drum Kit Mode

1 Press the [DRUM KIT] button to enter the Drum Kit mode, then select a Drum Kit that most closely matches your desired set- tings.

2 Select the menu you wish to edit by press- ing the [F1] [F6] buttons. When sub menus are assigned to the [SF1] [SF6] buttons, select the desired sub menu for editing by pressing the [SF1] [SF6] buttons.

When editing parameters in the [F2] VOICE, [F3] STK/ALT and [F5] PAD display, follow the procedure below.

2-1 From the [F2] VOICE display, press the [SF5] but- ton to select INPUT or SOURCE. When INPUT is selected, you can edit the parameters for each Trigger Input jack (pages 12 and 60). When SOURCE is selected, you can edit the parameters for each Trigger Source (page 61).

2-2 Select the Trigger Input jack or Trigger Input Source by hitting the corresponding pad or by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial with the cursor located on the INPUT or SOURCE position.

3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter by using the Cursor buttons, then set the value by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button after making the settings. The following display appears.

5 Select the Drum Kit bank and number as destination by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/ NO] buttons and data dial.

6 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The display prompts you for conrmation. To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

7 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation.

NOTE When a USB storage device is connected to the USB TO DEVICE ter-

minal, you can store your original Drum Kit to the external (EXT-A EXT-P) banks as well as the internal User (USR) bank.

The edited Drum Kit will be lost when selecting a different Drum Kit or turning the power off. Make sure to store the Drum Kit data to internal memory by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button before selecting a different Drum Kit or turning the power off.

Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM (while a Please keep power on message is shown), otherwise all the User Drum Kit data on the instrument may be damaged or lost.

NOTICE

78 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Selecting a Drum Kit [F1] PLAY

Explanations about the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F1] PLAY are described on page 30 in the Quick Guide.

Setting Drum Voice Parameters [F2] VOICE

Each of the displays called up via the [F2] button and [SF1] [SF4] buttons provides two indication types: INPUT and SOURCE, which are shown at the top left of the display. From these displays, pressing the [SF5] button toggles the display type between INPUT (meaning that parameters can be edited for each Trigger Input jack) and SOURCE (meaning that parameters can be edited for each Trigger Input Source).

When the INPUT display is called up, you can assign a Voice Set to each of the Trigger Input jacks. When the SOURCE display is called up, you can assign a Drum Voice to each of the Trigger Input Sources of the pad. By setting the SOURCE to MIDI on the SOURCE display, you can assign the Drum Voice to each MIDI note number. This is conve- nient when using the Stack/Alternate function (page 86).

When the INPUT display is called up:

1 INPUT Determines the Trigger Input jack (to which the desired pad is connected). When Input Lock 5 is turned off, you can select the Trigger Input jack also by hitting the corresponding pad.

B Voice Set category Determines the Voice Set category.

C Voice Set number Determines the Voice Set number included in the Voice Set category selected at 2.

D [SF5] SOURCE Pressing the [SF5] button toggles the display type between INPUT (meaning that parameters can be edited for each Trigger Input jack) and SOURCE (meaning that parameters can be edited for each Trigger Input Source).

E [SF6] Input Lock You can turn the Input Lock on or off by pressing this button. When Input Lock is turned on (the [L] indicator appears at the top right of the display), the Trigger Input jack 1 cannot be changed even if you hit any pad. This function is useful when you want to adjust the parameters of the current pad (connected to the current Trigger Input jack) while hitting other pads.

When the SOURCE display is called up:

1 SOURCE Determines the Trigger Input Source. When Input Lock 5 is turned off, you can select the Trigger Input Source also by hit- ting the corresponding section of the pad.

B Voice category Determines the Voice Category.

Assigning the Drum Voice to the Pad [SF1] SELECT

NOTE For information about the relationship between Drum Kits, Drum Voices,

Voice Sets, Trigger Input Sources and Trigger Input jacks, see page 62.

Settings snare, tom1, tom2, tom3, tom4, ride, crash1, crash2, hihat, kick, pad11, pad12, pad13, pad14, pad15

Settings kick, snare, tom, cymbal, hihat, perc, efct

NOTE In the INPUT display, an asterisk (*) will appear when the Voice set at

each Trigger Input source is different from that in the current Voice Set.

4

1

32

5

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

Settings Refer to the Trigger Input Source List on page 61. When MIDI is selected, you can assign the Drum Voice to each of the MIDI note numbers.

Settings

kick1, kick2, snare1, snare2, snare3, tom1, tom2, cymbal, hihat, perc1, perc2, efct1, efct2, USR-A, USR-B, USR-C, USR-D, USR-E, USR-F, USR-G, USR-H

4

1

32

5

DTX900 Owners Manual 79

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

C Voice number Determines the Voice number included in the Voice category selected at 2.

D [SF5] INPUT Pressing the [SF5] button toggles the display type between INPUT (meaning that parameters can be edited for each Trigger Input jack) and SOURCE (meaning that parameters can be edited for each Trigger Input Source).

E [SF6] Input Lock You can turn Input Lock on or off by pressing this button. When Input Lock is turned on (the [L] indicator appears at the top right of the display), the Trigger Input Source 1 cannot be changed even if you hit any pad. This function is useful when you want to adjust the parameters of the current Trigger Input Source while hitting the pads of other Trigger Input Sources.

When MIDI is selected as SOURCE, the following dis- play appears.

1 Note number Determines the MIDI note number to which you can assign the desired Drum Voice.

From this display, you can set parameters such as volume and tuning. This display consists of two pages, which can be called up via the Cursor [N] and [M] buttons.

The rst page when the INPUT display is called up:

The rst page when the SOURCE display is called up:

The initial page when the SOURCE display is called up and MIDI is selected:

1 Volume When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the volume of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the volume of each selected Trigger Input Source. You can adjust the volume balance among the Voices assigned to the pads by setting this parameter.

B Tuning When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the pitch of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the pitch of each selected Trigger Input Source. The Tuning parameter can be adjusted nely in cents.

C PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

NOTE Check the Stack/Alternate settings; when ---- is displayed, you can-

not select the voice category and number (page 86 and 126).

Settings C#1 A#5

NOTE MIDI note messages from an external MIDI device can also be used

to set this parameter. Once this is set via MIDI, Input Lock can be used to disable further inadvertent editing.

1

Setting Volume, Tuning and Other Parameters

[SF2] OUT-TUNE

Range 0 127

Range -24.00 +24.00

3 2 1

3 2 1

3 2 1

80 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

The second page when the INPUT display is called up:

The second page when the SOURCE display is called up:

D RevSend (Reverb Send) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the Reverb Send level of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the Reverb Send level of each selected Trigger Input Source.

E ChoSend (Chorus Send) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the Chorus Send level of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the Chorus Send level of each selected Trigger Input Source.

F VarSend (Variation Send) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the Variation Send level of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter deter- mines the Variation Send level of each selected Trigger Input Source.

G Dry Level When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the unprocessed (dry) level of the Reverb/Chorus effects signal for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE dis- play is called up, this parameter determines the unprocessed (dry) level of the Reverb/Chorus effects signal for each selected Trigger Input Source.

H Pan When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the pan (stereo) position of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter deter- mines the pan (stereo) position of each selected Trigger Input Source.

I OutputSel (Output Select) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the Output jack of each selected Trigger Input Jack will be trans- mitted to the external device. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the Output jack of each selected Trigger Input Source will be transmitted to the exter- nal device.

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

4 8567 9

4 8567 9

Range L63 C R63

Settings

L&R+ph (OUTPUT and PHONES), phones (PHONES), ind1&2 ind5&6 (INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 and 2 5 and 6), ind1 ind6 (one of the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUTs), dryL&R (OUTPUT, Effect is not applied.)

NOTE In the INPUT display, an asterisk (*) will appear when the value set at

each Trigger Input source is different from this parameter.

DTX900 Owners Manual 81

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

From this display, you can set the EQ related parameters and the Tone related parameters such as attack and release. This display consists of two pages, which can be called up via the Cursor [N] and [M] buttons.

The rst page when the INPUT display is called up:

The rst page when the SOURCE display is called up:

The rst page when the SOURCE display is called up and MIDI is selected:

1 Low Frequency When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/ boosted for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/ boosted for each selected Trigger Input Source.

B Low Gain When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the low EQ band for each selected Trig- ger Input Source.

C Mid Frequency When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the center frequency of the middle EQ band that is attenuated/ boosted for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the center frequency of the middle EQ band that is attenuated/ boosted for each selected Trigger Input Source.

D Mid Gain When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the middle EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE dis- play is called up, this parameter determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the middle EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Source.

E MID Q When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the frequency bandwidth of the middle EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the frequency bandwidth of the middle EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Source.

F High Frequency When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/ boosted for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/ boosted for each selected Trigger Input Source.

G High Gain When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE dis- play is called up, this parameter determines the amount of boost or attenuation applied to the high EQ band for each selected Trigger Input Source.

H PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

Setting EQ- and Tone-related Parameters

[SF3] EQ-TONE

Range 50.1 2.00k

Range -32 +32

8 7621 43 5

8 1 3 5 6

2 4 7

8 1 3 5 6

2 4 7

Range 139.7 10.1k

Range -32 +32

Range 0 31

Range 503.8 14.0k

Range -32 +32

82 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

The second page when the INPUT display is called up:

The second page when the SOURCE display is called up:

I Attack When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the attack time (from the moment a pad is hit until the moment the maximum initial level of the volume is reached) of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the attack time of each selected Trigger Input Source.

J Decay When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the decay time (indicating how fast the volume falls from maxi- mum attack level) of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the decay time of each selected Trigger Input Source.

K Release When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the release time of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the release time of each selected Trigger Input Source.

L Filter When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass lter for each selected Trig- ger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass l- ter for each selected Trigger Input Source.

M Q (Resonance) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the resonance of the low pass lter for each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the resonance of the low pass lter for each selected Trigger Input Source. You can use this parameter to add further character to the sound or change the sound in more dramatic ways.

Range -64 +63

Range -64 +63

Range -64 +63

NOTE This parameter is available only when the RcvKeyOff parameter is set

to on.

9 MJ K L

9 MJ K L

Range -64 +63

Range -64 +63

These frequencies are passed by the lter.

High sounds are muted.

Frequency (pitch)

Cutoff frequency

Low Pass Filter

Volume

Resonance

Frequency Cutoff frequency

Level

DTX900 Owners Manual 83

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

From this display, you can set parameters such as Mono/ Poly and Alternate Group. This display consists of two pages, which can be called up via the Cursor [N] and [M] buttons.

The rst page when the INPUT display is called up:

The rst page when the SOURCE display is called up:

The rst page when the SOURCE display is called up and MIDI is selected:

1 Mono/Poly When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter deter- mines the playback of each selected Trigger Input Jack, mono or polyphonic. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the playback of each selected Trigger Input Source, mono or polyphonic. If Mono is selected, hitting the same pad repeatedly in suc- cession will stop the sound generated by the previous hit, then start the same sound again. If Poly is selected, this limita- tion does not apply.

B AltGroup (Alternate Group) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter deter- mines the Alternate Group to which each selected Trigger Input Jack is assigned. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the Alternate Group to which each selected Trigger Input Source is assigned. In a real acoustic drum kit, some drum sounds cannot physi- cally be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi- hats. You can prevent Drum Voices from playing back simulta- neously by assigning them to the same Alternate Group. Up to 127 Alternate Groups can be dened. You can also select off here if you wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds.

C RcvKeyOff (Receive Key Off) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter deter- mines whether or not each selected Trigger Input Jack responds to MIDI Note Off messages. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines whether or not each selected Trigger Input Source responds to MIDI Note Off messages. This parameter is normally set to off since the sounds of many Drum Voices naturally decay and stop without the need for Note Off messages. This parameter should be set to on when the current Drum Voice has a sustained, non-decaying sound, so that you can stop the sound by sending MIDI note off mes- sages to the internal tone generator. The timing the MIDI note off message is transmitted to the internal tone generator is determined by the Gate Time parameter in the STK/ALT dis- play. You can also use the Hold Mode parameter to control MIDI Note Off messages (page 94).

D PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

Setting Other Parameters

[SF4] OTHER

Settings mono, poly

NOTE In the INPUT display, an asterisk (*) will appear when the value set at

each Trigger Input source is different from this parameter.

21

3

4

21

3

4

21

3

4

Settings off, HHOpen, HHClose, 1 124

NOTE Concerning the Drum Voices assigned to the same number (1 124) of

the Alternate Group, only one of these Voices will be played back fol- lowing the last-hitting priority. Concerning the Drum Voices assigned to the HHOpen and HHClose, a special rule (below) is applied.

Playing the Voice assigned to HHOpen will not stop the sound of the Voice assigned to HHOpen or HHClose. Playing the Voice assigned HHClose will stop the sound of the Voice assigned to HHOpen.

In the INPUT display, an asterisk (*) will appear when the value set at each Trigger Input source is different from this parameter.

Settings off, on

NOTE In the INPUT display, an asterisk (*) will appear when the value set at

each Trigger Input source is different from this parameter.

84 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

The second page when the INPUT display is called up:

The second page when the SOURCE display is called up:

E VelSensDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines the degree to which the resulting volume of each selected Trigger Input Jack responds to the strength with which you hit the pad. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the degree to which the resulting volume of each selected Trigger Input Source responds to the strength with which you hit the pad. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your hitting strength (as shown below).

F VelSensOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter (for which the value is indicated in the knob icon) determines how the played velocities of each selected Trigger Input Jack affect the actual resulting velocity. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines how the played velocities of each selected Trigger Input Source affect the actual result- ing velocity. This lets you raise or lower all velocities by the same amountallowing you to automatically compensate for play- ing too strongly or too softly. If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 0. If the result is higher than 127, the value is set to 127.

G SliderSel (Slider Select) When the INPUT display is called up, this parameter deter- mines the Slider with which you can adjust the volume of each selected Trigger Input Jack. When the SOURCE display is called up, this parameter determines the Slider with which you can adjust the volume of each selected Trigger Input Source.

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

56 7

756

127

0 127

Depth=64

Depth=32

Depth=0

Depth=127

Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone

generator block)

Velocity at which pad is hit

When the VelSensOfs parameter below is set to 64:

Settings kick, snare, tom, cymbal, hihat, misc

127

0 12764

127

0 12764

127

0 12764

Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone

generator)

Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone

generator)

Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone

generator)

Velocity at which pad is hit

Velocity at which pad is hit

Velocity at which pad is hit

When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 64

When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 96

When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 32

DTX900 Owners Manual 85

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

Programming the Stack/Alternate [F3] STK/ALT

The Stack function lets you play several Drum Voices simultaneously by hitting only a single pad, while the Alternate func- tion lets you play different Drum Voice(s) alternately. In addition, the Stack function lets you play chords by using pitched Voices (called Normal Voices in Yamaha synthesizers) which can be called up by setting the CH (MIDI channel) to a number other than 10 (this channel is normally used by the DTX900 to play the Drum Voice) and assigning the Voice number to the corresponding channel in the display called up via [F6] OTHER [SF3] MIDI. Note that the Stack/Alternate parameters can be set only for each Trigger Input Source.

When the cursor is located on the STEP column:

1 SOURCE (Trigger Input Source) Determines the Trigger Input Source which triggers the Stack/ Alternate function. You can change the Trigger Input Source by hitting the corresponding pad when Input Lock is turned off.

B STEP Determines the step number of the Alternate function. Only one Step 001 is preprogrammed in most preset Drum Kits., meaning that the Stack/Alternate function is not used. For example, each of the STEP 001 lines indicates the pro- gram when hitting the pad for the rst time. Each of the STEP 002 lines indicates the program when hitting the pad for the second time. Likewise, the rest of the numbers such as 003 and 004 are the same as above. When the number of the existing step is changed, the new step numbers line blinks. Pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button to x the step number and stop blinking.

C [SF1] INSERT Pressing this button inserts a new step at the current cursor location and increases the numbers of all the already-pro- grammed steps after the cursor location by 1.

D [SF2] ADD Pressing this button adds a new step of the same number as that at the current cursor location without affecting the num- bers of the other steps.

E [SF3] DELETE Pressing this button deletes the step at the current cursor loca- tion. If the step number is gone by deleting a certain step, the numbers of all the already-programmed steps after the cursor location are decreased by 1.

F [SF4] CLEAR Pressing this button clears the step at the current cursor loca- tion without affecting the numbers of the other steps.

G [SF5] CHORD Pressing this button calls up the different display used when you enter the Stack program by playing the external MIDI keyboard connected to the MIDI IN connector. For details, see page 87.

H [SF6] Input Lock You can turn Input Lock on or off by pressing this button. When Input Lock is turned on (the [L] indicator appears at the top right of the display), the Trigger Input jack 1 cannot be changed even if you hit any pad. This function is useful when you want to adjust the parameters of the current pad (con- nected to the current Trigger Input jack) while hitting other pads.

The rst page when the cursor is not located on the STEP column:

1 CH (MIDI channel) Determines the MIDI channel. With the default initial set- tings, this parameter is set to 10, which is normally used for the Drum Voice. If you want to play a pitched Voice, set this parameter to a number other than 10.

NOTE In the internal tone generator of the DTX900, MIDI channel 10 is exclusively used for the Drum Voices. The MIDI messages

generated by your drum performance will be transmitted to the internal tone generator over MIDI channel 10.

Programming the Stack/Alternate

Settings Refer to page 61.

Settings 001 100

NOTE Up to 100 events for each Trigger Input Source (a total of 500 events

for each Drum Kit) can be entered. An error message appears when you try to enter more steps than the limitation.

3

1

2

4 5 6 7 8

Settings 1 16

NOTE You can assign the Voice to each of the MIDI channels 1 16 on the

display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F6] OTHER [SF3] MIDI. This setting can be performed for each of the Drum Kits.

1 2 3

4 5

6

86 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

B NOTE Determines the MIDI note number of the corresponding step.

C GATETIME Determines the gate time (length from the moment you hit the pad to the moment the corresponding note off is transmitted to the tone generator block). In effect, this determines how long the resulting sound lasts.

D [SF3] ALL Regarding the CH, NOTE, GATE TIME and VELOCITY LIMIT parameters, you can change the current values of all the steps by simultaneously holding this button and using the data dial, [INC/DEC] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

E [SF4] STEP Regarding the CH, NOTE, GATE TIME and VELOCITY LIMIT parameters, you can change the current values of the current step number by simultaneously holding this button and using the data dial, [INC/DEC] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

F > (page) This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

The second page:

1 VELOCITY LIMIT Determines the minimum and maximum values of the veloc- ity range within which the Drum Voice will sound. The Drum Voice will sound only when you hit the pad at velocities within the range specied here.

Example Stack/Alternate program

Here is an example of how you can use Stack/Alternate. In this example, hitting the pad once produces a C major chord. Hitting it a second time produces a G major chord, and a third hit produces a C major chord again.

To create the above program, follow the procedure below.

1 Press the [F6] OTHER button followed by the [SF3] MIDI button to call up the MIDI display, allowing you to set the tone gener- ator settings for each of the MIDI 16 chan- nels.

2 Move the cursor to channel 11.

3 Move the cursor down to the TRANSMIT row, then set the TRANSMIT parameter of channel 11 to All or PC.

Settings off, C#-2 G8

NOTE For details about the relationship between the Drum Voices and MIDI

note numbers, see page 62.

Range 0.0s 9.9s

Range 0 127

1

Example program of the Stack/Alternate

Step 001 The program for hitting the pad for the rst time.

Step 002 The program for hitting the pad for the second time.

Step 003 The program for hitting the pad for the third time.

DTX900 Owners Manual 87

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

4 Move the cursor down again and set the VCE NUM, BANK MSB and BANK LSB, which determine the Voice program num- ber. For a complete list of available Voices, refer to the Data List booklet.

5 Call up the Stack/Alternate display again by pressing the [F3] STK/ALT button.

6 Create the program as illustrated above. Enter the appropriate values shown in the Example Program illustration at the top of this section, using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] buttons and data dial. (You can also enter the notes directly from a MIDI keyboard; see Programming the Stack from an external MIDI keyboard below.)

7 Try out the newly created Stack/Alternate program by hitting the pad as many times as the step number.

8 Store the settings as a User Drum Kit by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button.

You can enter note events from an external MIDI keyboard connected to the MIDI IN connector of the DTX900. This conveniently lets you play the chords and notes and directly enter them to the Stack program.

1 Connect one end of the MIDI cable to the MIDI OUT connector of the MIDI keyboard and the other to the MIDI IN connector of the DTX900.

2 On the MIDI keyboard, make the appropri- ate settings so that the MIDI connector is active. If the MIDI keyboard is equipped with a USB TO HOST ter- minal, you may need to manually enable MIDI operation, depending on the MIDI parameter settings of your keyboard. For details, refer to the Owners Manual of the MIDI key- board.

3 On the DTX900, set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to enable MIDI operation. From the display called up via the [UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF3] OTHER, set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to MIDI.

4 Call up the Stack/Alternate display again by pressing the [F3] STK/ALT button.

5 Press the [SF5] CHORD button to call up the Chord display. This display is used for receiving MIDI note events from an external MIDI device and applying them to the current Stack/ Alternate program.

6 Set the Step number by using the data dial, [INC/DEC] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

7 Play the MIDI keyboard. The notes you play on the MIDI keyboard (along with the cor- responding MIDI channel) appear in the display.

8 Press the [F6] OK button to actually apply the received notes to the current Stack/ Alternate program. If you do not want to apply the received notes to the program, press the [F5] CANCEL button to go back to the original dis- play.

9 Repeat steps 6 8 as desired.

10 Store the settings as a User Drum Kit by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button.

Programming the Stack From an External MIDI Keyboard

[SF5] CHORD

88 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Effect Settings [F4] EFFECT

From the displays called up via the [F4] EFFECT button, you can set the Effect related parameters for the current Drum Kit. In the Drum Kit mode, you can set the parameters of the Reverb effects, Chorus effects and Variation Effects. The Reverb and Chorus effects are applied to the entire DTX900 sound as well as the Drum Kit sound while the Variation effects are applied only to the Drum Kit sound. For details about the Effect structure, see page 68.

This display gives you at-a-glance, overall view of the effect routing and comprehensive control over the effects.

1 Variation Effect Category Determines the Variation Effect Category.

B Variation Effect Type Determines the Variation Effect Type.

C Chorus Effect Category Determines the Chorus Effect Category.

D Chorus Effect Type Determines the Chorus Effect Type.

E Reverb Effect Type Determines the Reverb Effect Type. You need not select the Reverb Effect Category because the effect types of the Reverb block are not divided into multiple categories.

F Variation Return Determines the Return level of the Variation Effect.

G Variation To Chorus Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Varia- tion Effect to the Chorus Effect.

H Variation To Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Varia- tion Effect to the Reverb Effect.

I Variation Pan Determines the pan position of the Variation effect sound.

J Chorus Return Determines the Return level of the Chorus Effect.

K Chorus To Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect.

L Chorus Pan Determines the pan position of the Chorus effect sound.

M Reverb Return Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.

N Reverb Pan Determines the pan position of the Reverb effect sound.

O [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of all three Effect blocks (Reverb, Chorus and Variation) between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black), the Reverb, Chorus and Variation Effects are applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white), one or two or all three of the Effects will be bypassed for the Drum Kit sound. The box surrounding the bypassed Effect block (either of C: VAR, C: CHO, and REV) is indi- cated with a dotted line while the box surrounding the non- bypassed Effect block is indicated with a solid line.

Effect Connection Settings [SF1] CONNECT

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Range 0 127

1 2 8 7 3 4 K 5

MLJ6 N9 O

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range L63 (far left) C (center) R63 (far right)

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range L63 (far left) C (center) R63 (far right)

Range 0 127

Range L63 (far left) C (center) R63 (far right)

DTX900 Owners Manual 89

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

1 Category

B Type Equivalent to 1 and 2 of the [SF1] CONNECT display. You can select the Variation Effect type from the Type column. If it is difcult to nd the desired Effect type, select the Category rst, then select the Type.

C Preset You can set various parameters in order to change how the sound is affected by the selected Effect type. This parameter lets you call up the pre-programmed settings of these effect parameters.

D Effect Parameters The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. Refer to page 72 for details about the Effect parameters. Refer to the sepa- rate Data List booklet for information on the parameters for each Effect type.

E PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

F [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of the Variation Effect between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black), the Variation Effect is applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white), the Variation Effect is not applied to the Drum Kit sound.

1 Type Equivalent to 5 of the [SF1] CONNECT display. You can select the Reverb Effect type from the Type column.

B Preset You can set various parameters in order to change how the sound is affected by the selected Effect type. This parameter lets you call up the pre-programmed settings of these effect parameters.

C Effect Parameters The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. Refer to page 72 for details about the Effect parameters. Refer to the sepa- rate Data List booklet for information on the parameters for each Effect type.

D PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

E [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of the Reverb Effect between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black), the Reverb Effect is applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white), the Reverb Effect is not applied to the Drum Kit sound.

Variation Effect Settings [SF2] VAR

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

53 21

6

4

Reverb Effect Settings [SF3] REVERB

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

1 3

5

4

2

90 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

1 Category

B Type Equivalent to 3 and 4 of the [SF1] CONNECT display. You can select the Chorus Effect type from the Type column. If it is difcult to nd the desired Effect type, select the Category rst, then select the Type.

C Preset You can set various parameters in order to change how the sound is affected by the selected Effect type. This parameter lets you call up the pre-programmed settings of these effect parameters.

D Effect Parameters The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. Refer to page 72 for details about the Effect parameters. Refer to the sepa- rate Data List booklet for information on the parameters for each Effect type.

E PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

F [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of the Chorus Effect between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (the BYPASS indication is shown with white text in black), the Chorus Effect is applied to the Drum Kit sound. When Bypass is turned on (the BYPASS indication is shown with black text in white), the Chorus Effect is not applied to the Drum Kit sound.

Chorus Effect Settings [SF4] CHORUS

Settings Details about the Effect categories and types are described on page 70.

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

53 21

6

4

DTX900 Owners Manual 91

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

Pad Settings [F5] PAD

From this display, you can assign a function to the Pad Controller with which the TP100 and XP120SD are equipped.

1 INPUT (Trigger Input jack) Determines the Trigger Input jack (equivalent to the con- nected pad) to be edited. Note that this parameter can be set only for each Trigger Input jack.

B Pad Controller Type Determines the function assigned to the Pad Controller of the pad connected to the Trigger Input jack specied at 1.

off No function is assigned to the Pad Controller. snares Turning the Pad Controller adjusts how strongly

or softly the snappy parameter is stretched, or adjusts the Snares On/Off and Snares Adjust parameters in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF2] SNARES. Turning the Pad Controller to the left (counter- clockwise) progressively loosens the snappy effect, and nally unlocks it. Turning the Pad Controller to the right (clockwise) tightens the snappy effect. If the snappy effect is unlocked, turn the Pad Controller to the right to lock it.

tuning The Pad Controller adjusts the tuning of the Drum Voice, or adjusts the Tuning parameters in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT-TUNE. Turning the Pad Controller to the left (counter- clockwise) lowers the pitch. Turning the Pad Controller to the right (clockwise) raises the pitch.

tempo The Pad Controller adjusts the tempo of the Song playback or Click sound. The LED display shows the tempo of the Song or Click sound while turning the Pad Controller.

lter The Pad Controller adjusts the tonal character- istics of the Drum Voice, or adjusts the Filter parameter in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF3] EQ-TONE. Turning the Pad Controller to the left (counter- clockwise) makes the Drum Voice sound more mufed or darker. Turning the Pad Controller to the right (clockwise) makes the Drum Voice sound brighter.

voice Turning the Pad Controller sets the snappy on/ off status or sets the Snares On/Off parameters in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF2] SNARES. Turning the Pad Controller to the left (counter- clockwise) unlocks the snappy effect, or sets the Snares On/Off parameters to off. Turning the Pad Controller to the right (clockwise) locks the snappy effect, or sets the Snares On/Off param- eters to on.

C [SF6] Input Lock You can turn the Input Lock on or off by pressing this button. When the Input Lock is turned on (the [L] indicator appears at the top right of the display), the Trigger Input jack 1 cannot be changed even if you hit any pad. This function is useful when you want to adjust the parameters of the current pad (connected to the current Trigger Input jack) while hitting other pads.

From this display, you can set the parameters related to the

snappy effect of the snare drum pad connected to the

SNARE jack. These parameters can be changed also from

the Pad Controller of the drum pad connected to the

SNARE jack.

Keep in mind that the settings in this display are available

only for the drum pad connected to the SNARE jack.

1 Snares On/Off Determines the snappy effects status. When set to on, the snappy effect is locked. When set to off, it is unlocked.

Assigning a Function to the Pad Controller

[SF1] PADCTRL

Settings snare, tom1, tom2, tom3, tom4, ride, crash1, crash2, hihat, kick, pad11, pad12, pad13, pad14, pad15

Settings off, snares, tuning, tempo, lter, voice

2

3

1

NOTE The initial default setting of the Pad Controller Type differs depending

on the Drum Kit. The available value above differs depending on the selected Trigger

Input jack. For example, snares and voice are available only when the INPUT (Trigger Input jack) is set to snare.

Snappy Settings [SF2] SNARES

Settings off, on

12 3

92 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

B Snares Adjust Determines the degree to which the snappy effect is stretched. Setting this to 1 makes the snappy effect most loose. The higher the value, the tighter the stretching is.

C Snare Buzz Determines whether or not the snappy effect resonates with the Kick or Tom sound. When set to on, the snappy effect res- onates with the Kick or Tom sound.

From this display, you can set the parameters related to the Pad Song for each Trigger Input Source. The Pad Song function lets you play a Song by hitting the pad instead of pressing the [>/] button. One Song is assigned to one Trigger Input Source and up to four Pad Songs can be set.

1 SOURCE (Trigger Input Source) Determines the Trigger Input Source to which you want to assign the Pad Song. You can change the Trigger Input Source by hitting the corresponding pad when Input Lock is turned off.

B Pad Song Determines whether or not the Pad Song is assigned to the selected Trigger Input Source. When set to on, the Trigger Input Source can be used to start playback of the Song speci- ed below. When set to off, the rest of the parameters below cannot be set.

C Song No (Song number) Determines the Song number when the Pad Song is set to on. You can start playback of the Song specied here by hitting the pad corresponding to the Trigger Input Source. When the Pad Song is set to off, this parameter cannot be set.

D Repeat Determines whether or not the song plays back repeatedly. When set to on, the Song (started by hitting the pad) will play back repeatedly. When set to off, the Song playback will stop automatically when it reaches the end.

E Mode Determines how the Song playback responds to your pad hit- ting. When play is selected, hitting the pad starts or stops the specied Song. When chase is selected, hitting the pad plays only one measure of the specied Song. When cutoff is selected, hitting the pad stops any Songs started by hitting other pads (for which the Mode parameter is set to cutoff) then starts the specied Song. Hitting the pad again stops the specied Song. Keep in mind that only a single Song can play back from all the Pad Songs for which the Mode parameter is set to cutoff.

F [SF5] INFO (Information) Pressing this button calls up the display which indicates the Pad Song settings.

Range 1 24

NOTE Setting this parameter changes the Decay parameter of snareHd

and snareOp in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF3] EQ-TONE.

Settings off, 1 5

Pad Song Settings [SF3] PADSONG

Settings Refer to the Trigger Input Source List on page 61.

Settings off, on

NOTE You can play up to four pad songs from one drum kit. If you have

already specied four pad songs for other trigger input sources, the following parameter 3 5 cannot be set and is shown in the display.

Settings PRE: 01 87, USR: 01 50

1 32

4

6 5

Settings off, on

Settings play, chase, cutoff

NOTE The Pad Song plays back according to the tempo specied in the

Song mode or Click mode. The DTX900 has only the single tempo value.

Keep in mind that hitting the pad softly may not start the Pad Song. Make sure to hit the pad more strongly than a specied level.

If both the Pad Function (which can be set in the display called up via the [UTILITY] [F2] PAD [SF2] PADFUNC) and Pad Song are assigned to the Trigger Input Source, the Pad Song setting is can- celed.

Depending on the selected Pad Songs and normal Song, an unex- pected sound may be produced. This is because each Song may be transmitting different setups to the internal tone generator via the same MIDI channel. If you plan on using two or more Songs together, you should make sure that the MIDI channels used for the Songs are all set to different values.

DTX900 Owners Manual 93

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

From this display, you can set the parameters which deter- mine how the DTX900 responds to the Trigger Signal for each Trigger Input Source. This display consists of two pages.

1 SOURCE (Trigger Input Source) Determines the Trigger Input Source to be edited. You can change the Trigger Input Source by hitting the corresponding pad when Input Lock is turned off.

B TrigLink (Trigger Link) When any other value than off is selected here, different Trigger Input Sources (on the same pad) can generate the Trigger Signals simultaneously by simply hitting a certain Trigger Input Source. Keep in mind that the available values (Trigger Input Source) differ depending on the Trigger Input Source specied at 1.

C TrigVelocity (Trigger Velocity) Determines the value of velocity generated by hitting the pad corresponding to the SOURCE specied at 1. When vari- able is selected, the velocity value is determined by your hit- ting strength. When a value between 1 127 is selected, the corresponding value is used as the velocity regardless of your hitting strength.

D PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

E [SF6] Input Lock You can turn Input Lock on or off by pressing this button. When Input Lock is turned on (the [L] indicator appears at the top right of the display), the Trigger Input jack 1 cannot be changed even if you hit any pad. This function is useful when you want to adjust the parameters of the current pad (con- nected to the current Trigger Input jack) while hitting other pads.

F TrigAltGroup (Trigger Alternate Group) Determines the Alternate Group to which the Trigger Input Source is assigned. If multiple Trigger Input Source are grouped with the same number assigned, only one input from that group is enabled at a time. When a Trigger Input Source is enabled from a trigger alternate group, other Trigger Input Source from the same group respectively generate a MIDI note off event for the corresponding MIDI note number. The RcvKeyOff parameter for the drum Voice (10 ch) should be set to on in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER. Up to 32 Alternate Groups can be dened. You can also select off here if you wish to allow the simultaneous playback of sounds.

G TrigMono/Poly (Trigger Mono/Poly) Determines whether the current Trigger Input Source is played back monophonically or polyphonically. If mono is selected, triggering the same Voice continuously will stop the previous sound, then start the same Voice sound. Note that the previous sound is stopped by a note off message, unlike the Mono/Poly parameter in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER. Accordingly, the RcvKeyOff parameter for the Voice (current Trigger Input Source) should be set to on in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER. If Poly is selected, there is no such limitation.

H Mask Time Determines the amount of time within which the DTX900 does not accept the Trigger Signal from the current Trigger Input Source after you hit the corresponding pad. When this parameter is set to 2.0s for example, the DTX900 ignores the Trigger Signal for two seconds after you hit the corre- sponding pad.

I Hold Mode This parameter is normally set to off, so that that hitting the same pad (current Trigger Input Source) only triggers (starts) the corresponding Voice sound. On the other hand, when set to on, hitting the same pad alternately both triggers and stops the corresponding Voice sound. Because note off mes- sages are used for stopping the Voice sound, you need to set the RcvKeyOff parameter to on in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

Trigger Signal Settings [SF4] TRIGGER

Settings Refer to the Trigger Input Source List on page 61.

Settings off, head, rim1, rim2, rim1&2, bow, pad11

NOTE When SOURCE is set to hhFtCl, hhSplsh, or pad11, the Trigger

Link parameter is not available.

Settings variable, 1 127

34

5

21

67 89

Settings off, 1 32

Settings mono, poly

Settings off, 20ms, 40ms 10.00s (by 20ms), 20.00s, 30.00s

Settings off, on

94 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Other Settings [F6] OTHER

From this display, you can set the parameters applied to the entire sound of the current Drum Kit.

1 Volume Determines the volume of the entire Drum Kit.

B Tempo Determines the tempo value called up when you select the current Drum Kit. When off is selected, the tempo value is maintained when you select the current Drum Kit.

C RevSend (Reverb Send) Determines the Reverb depth applied to the Drum Kit. This parameter offsets the same parameter for each of the Drum Voices assigned to the current Drum Kit.

D ChoSend (Chorus Send) Determines the Chorus depth applied to the Drum Kit. This parameter offsets the same parameter for each of the Drum Voices assigned to the current Drum Kit.

E TrigSetupLink (Trigger setup link) Use this parameter to specify the trigger setup to be used when the current kit is selected. A trigger setup can be assigned to each different drum kit. Select off if the cur- rently selected drum kit does not need a special trigger setup.

From this display, you can set the parameters related to the Hi-Hat Controller (Foot Controller) connected to the HI- HAT jack (page 12).

1 Function Determines the function assigned to the Hi-Hat Controller. When Hi-Hat is selected, you can use the Hi-Hat Controller normally for playing the hi-hat cymbal. When MIDI is selected, you can generate MIDI messages by pressing the Hi- Hat Controller according to the settings of the MIDI Ch parameter and MIDI Type parameter described below.

B MIDI Ch Determines the MIDI channel over which operating the Hi- Hat Controller generates MIDI messages. This parameter is available only when the Function parameter is set to MIDI.

C MIDI Type Determines the type of MIDI messages generated by operat- ing the Hi-Hat Controller. This parameter is available only when the Function parameter is set to MIDI. Ctl000 Ctl119 represent Control Change messages, AT repre- sents Aftertouch, PB up represents Pitch Bend upward (when pressing) and PB down represents Pitch Bend down- ward (when pressing).

Settings Common to the Entire Drum Kit

[SF1] COMMON

Range 0 127

Range off, 30 300

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Settings off, PRE:01 09, USR:01 05

NOTE If TrigSetupLink is set to off, the trigger setup selected on the Utility

mode will be loaded by default whenever the DTX900 is turned on. (See page 125.) Following this, the trigger setup can be freely changed in the Trigger Mode. (See page 108.)

5 1 342

Hi-Hat Controller Settings [SF2] HH CTRL

Settings HiHat, MIDI

Settings 1 16

Settings Ctl000 Ctl119, AT, PB up, PB down

1 23

DTX900 Owners Manual 95

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

From this display, you can perform the MIDI settings called up when the current Drum Kit is selected. According to the settings here, MIDI messages for 16 channels will be transmitted to the internal tone generator or the external MIDI device via MIDI when the current Drum Kit is selected. This display consists of ve pages.

First page

1 TG SW (Tone Generator Switch) Determines whether or not the MIDI messages will be trans- mitted to the internal tone generator when the current Drum Kit is selected. When set to on, selecting the current Drum Kit transmits the MIDI messages for the corresponding channel to the internal tone generator according to the settings at 3 K.

B MIDI SW (MIDI Switch) Determines whether or not the MIDI messages will be trans- mitted to the external tone generator via MIDI OUT for each MIDI channel when the current Drum Kit is selected. When set to on, selecting the current Drum Kit transmits the MIDI messages for the corresponding channel to the external tone generator via MIDI OUT according to the settings at 3 K.

Second page

C TRANSMIT Determines the type of MIDI messages transmitted to the internal tone generator or external MIDI device. When off is selected, no MIDI message will be transmitted even if the TG SW and MIDI SW parameters are set to on. When all is selected, both Program Change and Control Change messages will be transmitted. When PC is selected, only Program Change messages will be transmitted.

D VOLUME Determines the value of the Volume (Control Change number 7) for each MIDI channel.

E PAN Determines the value of the Pan (Control Change number 10) for each MIDI channel.

Third page

F VCE NUM (Voice Number) Determines the Program Change number for each MIDI chan- nel.

G BANK MSB/LSB Determines the Program Change number (by Bank MSB/LSB values) for each MIDI channel.

Fourth page

H REV SEND (Reverb Send) Determines the value of the Reverb Send Level (Control Change number 91) for each MIDI channel.

I CHO SEND (Chorus Send) Determines the value of the Chorus Send Level (Control Change number 93) for each MIDI channel.

Fifth page

J CC NUM Determines the Control Change number for each MIDI chan- nel.

K CC VALUE Determines the value of the specied Control Change number for each MIDI channel.

MIDI Settings [SF3] MIDI

Settings Off, On

Settings Off, On

Settings Off, All, PC

Range 0 127

Range L63 (far left) C (center) R63 (far right)

1

2

4

3

5

Settings 1 128

Settings 0 127

NOTE For details about the Bank MSB, Bank LSB and Program Change

messages and how they determine the Voice of the DTX900, refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet.

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Settings Off, 1 95

Range 0 127

NOTE If you set a Control change event JK that duplicates the VOLUME 4, PAN 5, REV SEND 8, or CHO SEND 9 setting, the Control Change event JK will take priority.

6

7

9

8

K

J

96 DTX900 Owners Manual

Drum Kit Mode [DRUM KIT]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

From this display, you can assign an original name to the Drum Kit.

1 Name Enters the characters of the Drum Kit name (up to 12). You can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] LIST but- ton and enter the name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

B Icon Determines the Drum Kit icon shown on the [F1] PLAY dis- play. When off is selected, no icon will be shown in the [F1] PLAY display.

C [SF6] LIST When the cursor is located on the Name box, you can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] LIST button and enter the name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

From this display, you can copy the parameter settings from the specied Trigger Input jack/Trigger Input Source/ MIDI note of the specied Drum Kit to the specied Trig- ger Input jack/Trigger Input Source/MIDI note of the spec- ied User Drum Kit. After setting the parameters of copy source and destination, press the [ENTER/STORE] button to perform the Copy operation. The available parameters differ depending on the value of the Type parameter located at the left top corner.

When the Type is set to Input (Trigger Input jack):

When the Type is set to Source:

When the Type is set to MIDI:

1 Type Determines which segment is used as copy source and copy destination: the Trigger Input jack (Voice Set), Trigger Input Source (Voice) or MIDI (MIDI note).

B Source Drum Kit number Determines the Drum Kit number used as the source. Cur- rent means the currently edited Drum Kit.

C Copy Source Determines the source of the Copy operation. When the Type is set to Input, this parameter determines the Trigger Input jack used as the source. When the Type is set to Source, this parameter determines the Trigger Input Source used as the source. When the Type is set to MIDI, this parameter deter- mines the MIDI note name used as the source.

D Destination Drum Kit number Determines the Drum Kit number used as the destination. Current means the currently edited Drum Kit.

E Copy Destination Determines the destination of the Copy operation. When the Type is set to Input, this parameter determines the Trigger Input jack used as the destination. When the Type is set to Source, this parameter determines the Trigger Input Source used as the destination. When the Type is set to MIDI, this parameter determines the MIDI note name used as the desti- nation.

F STACK/ALTERNATE COPY When this checkmark is entered to this box, the Stack/Alter- nate settings are also copied. When this checkmark is removed from this box, the Stack/Alternate settings are not copied, with the exception of the rst note setting. Keep in mind that this parameter is not available when the Type is set to MIDI.

Naming the Drum Kit [SF4] NAME

Settings Acoustic, Rock, Electric, Percuss, Rhythm- Box, Effect, R&B/H-Hop, PadSong, off

Copying the Parameter Settings [SF5] COPY

1

3

2

431 2 56

Settings Input (Trigger Input jack), Source (Trigger Input Source), MIDI

Settings Current, PRE: 01 USR: 50

Settings Current, USR: 01 50

6 431 2 5

431 2 5

DTX900 Owners Manual 97

Reference

Song Mode [SONG]

This chapter explains the Song mode called up via the [SONG] button. In the Song mode, you can select a desired Song from the Preset Songs (PRE: 01 87) for performing and practicing along with, and another 50 User Songs (USR: 01 50) for recording and editing your own songs. In addition, you can select one of the SMF Songs (EXT: 01 99) saved to an external USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. These Songs can be called up directly even though they are stored in the external device.

Song Play [F1] PLAY

Explanations about the display called up via the [SONG] [F1] PLAY are described on page 35 in the Quick Guide.

Song Recording [F1] PLAY [REC]

Explanations about the Song Record mode called up via the [SONG] [F1] PLAY [REC] are described on page 43 in the Quick Guide.

Song Jobs [F2] JOB

The Song Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and data transform functions you can use to change the sound of the Song. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data.

NOTE In addition to the Song selected in the Song mode and started/stopped via the [>/] button on the panel, you can use Pad Songs

which let you start the specied Song by hitting the pad. For more information about Pad Songs, see page 93.

Song data recorded in the Song Record mode and edited in the Song Job mode resides in the DRAM temporarily, meaning that it will be lost by turning the power off. Make sure to save the Song data in the File mode to an external USB storage device con- nected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal before turning the power off.

Functions Descriptions

[SF1] SONG Song Job

01: Copy Song This Job copies all data from a selected source Song to the current Song.

02: Clear Song This Job clears all data from the current Song.

03: Song Name, Tempo, Repeat

This Job lets you set the name, tempo and repeat on/off settings for the current Song.

[SF2] TRACK Track Job

01: Quantize This job (applied to the current Song and specied track) adjusts the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat.

02: Mix Track This job mixes all data from both tracks 1 and 2 of the current Song to either track 1 or 2 of the current Song.

03: Copy Track This job copies all data from the specied track of the specied Song to the specied track of the current Song.

04: Clear Track This job clears all data from the specied track of the current Song.

[SF3] MEAS Measure Job

01: Copy Measure This job copies all data from the specied measure range of the specied track of the specied Song to the specied measure range of the specied track of the current Song.

02: Create Measure This job creates empty measures at the specied location in the specied track or tracks of the current Song.

03: Delete Measure This job deletes the specied measures of the current Song.

04: Erase Measure This job clears all data from the specied measure range of the current Song, producing a segment of silence.

[SF4] VOICE Voice Job

This job sets tone generator parameters, such as voice, volume and pan, for all 16 MIDI channels.

NOTICE

98 DTX900 Owners Manual

Song Mode [SONG]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

1 In the Song mode, select the desired User Song (to which you want to apply the Job) then press the [F2] JOB button to enter the Song Job mode.

2 Select the desired Job menu by pressing one of the [SF1] [SF4] buttons.

3 Move the cursor to the desired Job by using the data dial, cursor buttons, [INC/ YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons, then press the [ENTER/STORE] button to call up the Job display.

Pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the Job menu display.

4 Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then set the value by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

5 After setting, press the [ENTER/STORE] button to execute the Job.

6 Save the Song to a USB storage device in the File mode. For details, see pages 54 and 114.

01: Copy Song

This Job copies all data from a selected source Song to the current Song.

1 Song number Determines the source Song number to be copied. The corre- sponding Song name is shown at right of the Song number.

02: Clear Song

This Job clears all data from the current Song.

Basic Procedure in the Song Job Mode

NOTE Keep in mind that the Song Job mode can be entered only when a

User Song is selected.

Keep in mind that executing the Job will result in loss of your origi- nal data, since any data once changed by executing the Job can- not be restored.

In some Jobs, the operation overwrites any data previously exist- ing in the destination memory. Important data should always be saved to a USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

NOTICE

NOTICE

Song data created by executing the Job resides in the DRAM tem- porarily, meaning that it will be lost by turning the power off. Make sure to save the Song data in the File mode to an external USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal before turning the power off.

Song Jobs [SF1] SONG

Settings PRE: 01 87, USR: 01 50

NOTE If you want to clear the track data instead of the entire Song, use the

Clear Track Job on page 101.

NOTICE

1

DTX900 Owners Manual 99

Song Mode [SONG]

Reference

1

03: Song Name, Tempo, Repeat

This Job lets you set the name, tempo and repeat on/off set- tings for the current Song.

1 Name Enters the characters of the current Song name (up to 10). You can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] LIST but- ton and enter the name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

B Tempo Determines the tempo called up when the current Song is selected.

C Repeat Determines whether or not Song playback is repeated. Setting this parameter to on plays the current Song repeatedly, while setting this parameter to off plays through the current Song to the end, then stops.

D [SF6] LIST When the cursor is located on the Name box, you can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] LIST button and enter the name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

01: Quantize

This job (applied to the current Song and the specied track) adjusts the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat.

1 Track Determines the track (1 or 2) to which Quantize is applied.

B Quantize (Resolution) Determines the note timing to which the note data will be aligned. You can select the desired value by pressing the [SF6] button to call up the value list.

16th note triplet 16th note 8th note triplet 8th note 1/4 note triplet 1/4 note Dotted 1/4 note

C [SF6] (note type icon) When the cursor is located on the Quantize value, the note type icon is shown at the tab menu corresponding to the [SF6] button. In this condition, you can call up a list of the note type icons by pressing the [SF6] button, then select the desired item from the list.

02: Mix Track

This job mixes all data from both tracks 1 and 2 of the cur- rent Song to either track 1 or 2 of the current Song.

1 Track Determines the track (1 or 2) to which the mixed track is cop- ied. The track which is not selected here will have no data after executing the Mix Track Job.

NOTE Keep in mind that the pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button (execut-

ing the Job) is not necessary for the Song Name, Tempo, Repeat job.

Range 30 300

Settings off, on

Track Jobs [SF2] TRACK

Keep in mind that executing this Job may irrevocably change the rhythm feeling of your original performance (such as intentional early or late hits), because once the data is changed by executing the Job, it cannot be restored.

1

4

2 3

NOTICE

Settings 1, 2

Settings

When 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8 or 15/8 is selected: 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note, dotted 1/4 note When another value is selected: 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note

Settings 1, 2

1 2 3

1

00 DTX900 Owners Manual

Song Mode [SONG]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

03: Copy Track

This job copies all data from the specied track of the spec- ied Song to the specied track of the current Song.

1 Source Song number Determines the copy source Song number.

B Source Track number Determines the copy source track number of the Song speci- ed at 1.

C Destination Track number Determines the destination track number of the current Song.

04: Clear Track

This job clears all data from the specied track of the cur- rent Song.

1 Track Determines the track number to be cleared.

01: Copy Measure

This job copies all data from the specied measure range of the specied track of the specied Song to the specied measure range of the specied track of the current Song.

1 Source Song number Determines the source Song number.

B Source Track number Determines the source track number of the Song number specied at 1.

C Starting measure number of source measure range

Determines the starting measure of the source measure range.

D Ending measure number of source measure range

Determines the ending measure of the source measure range.

E Destination Track number Determines the destination track number of the current Song.

F Destination measure number Determines the starting measure of the destination measure range.

Settings PRE: 01 87, USR: 01 50

NOTE The songs EXT: 01 EXT: 99 (SMF songs saved in the root direc-

tory of the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE ter- minal) cannot be selected here.

Settings 1, 2

Settings 1, 2

This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination track.

Settings 1, 2

1

2

3

NOTICE

1

Measure Jobs [SF3] MEAS

NOTE When the cursor is located at a measure-related parameter, NUM is indi-

cated in the tab corresponding to the [SF6] button, meaning that you can use the [F1] [F6] buttons and the [SF1] [SF5] buttons as numeric key pads by pressing the [SF6] NUM button.

This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination mea- sure range of the track.

Settings PRE: 01 87, USR: 01 50

Settings 1, 2

Range 001 999

Range 001 999

Settings 1, 2

Range 001 999

NOTICE

1 2 3 4

5 6

DTX900 Owners Manual 101

Song Mode [SONG]

Reference

1

02: Create Measure

This job creates empty measures at the specied location in the specied track or tracks of the current Song. When empty measures are inserted, measure and meter data fol- lowing the insert point are moved backward accordingly.

1 Beat Determines the time signature of the newly created (inserted) measure.

B Number of measures to be inserted Determines the number of empty measures to be created and inserted.

C Track Determines the track to which this Job is applied. When 1+2 is selected, executing the Job adds the new measures to both the two tracks, with the result that the length of two tracks becomes the same. When 1 or 2 is selected, execut- ing the Job adds new measures only to track 1 or 2, with the result that the length of the two tracks will be different.

D Meas (Insertion point) Determines the insertion point (measure number) at which the newly created blank measures will be inserted.

03: Delete Measure

This job deletes the specied measures of the current Song. Measure and meter data following the deleted measures are moved forward accordingly.

1 Track Determines the track number to be deleted. When 1+2 is selected, executing the Job removes the specied measures from both the two tracks, with the result that the length of two tracks becomes the same. When 1 or 2 is selected, execut- ing the Job removes the specied measures only from track 1 or 2, with the result that the length of the two tracks will be different.

B Starting measure number of measure range Determines the starting measure of the measure range to be deleted.

C Ending measure number of measure range Determines the ending measure of the measure range to be deleted.

04: Erase Measure

This job clears all data from the specied measure range of the current Song, producing a segment of silence.

1 Track Determines the track number to be erased.

B Starting measure number of measure range Determines the starting measure of the measure range to be erased.

C Ending measure number of measure range Determines the ending measure of the measure range to be erased.

Settings 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

Settings 001 999

Settings 1+2, 1, 2

Range 001 999

4

1 2

3

Settings 1+2, 1, 2

Range 001 999

Range 001 999

Settings 1, 2

Range 001 999

Range 001 999

1 2 3

1 2 3

02 DTX900 Owners Manual

Song Mode [SONG]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

This job sets tone generator parameters, such as voice, vol- ume and pan, for all 16 MIDI channels. According to the settings here, the parameter values for all MIDI channels are transmitted to the internal tone generator or external tone generator via MIDI OUT when the current Song is selected. This Job display consists of three pages.

The rst page of the Voice Job

1 CH Indicates the MIDI channel.

B TRANSMIT Determines whether or not the MIDI messages will be trans- mitted to the internal and external tone generator when the current Song is selected. When set to All, selecting the current Song transmits all MIDI messages for the corresponding channel to the internal and external tone generator according to the settings made at 3 L. When set to PC, selecting the current Song transmits only the Voice-related settings made at 5 6. When set to off, selecting the current Song transmits no MIDI messages and the following parameters 3 L are not available.

C VOLUME Determines the value of the Volume (Control Change number 7) for each MIDI channel.

D PAN Determines the value of the Pan (Control Change number 10) for each MIDI channel.

The second page of the Voice Job

E VOICE NUM (Voice Number) Determines the Program Change number for each MIDI chan- nel.

F BANK MSB/LSB Determines the number of the Bank Select MSB and LSB for each MIDI channel. You can specify a specic Voice by set- ting the Bank Select MSB, LSB and Program Change (Voice number).

G [F4] PRE.KIT This menu appears only when the cursor is located on any of the VCE NUM, BANK MSB, and BANK LSB settings of channel 10. Pressing this button calls up the Bank Select MSB and LSB values corresponding to the Preset Drum Kit of the DTX900.

H [F4] USR.KIT This menu appears only when the cursor is located on any of the VCE NUM, BANK MSB, and BANK LSB settings of channel 10. Pressing this button calls up the Bank Select MSB and LSB values corresponding to the User Drum Kit of the DTX900.

I [F4] EXT.KIT This menu appears only when the cursor is located on any of the VCE NUM, BANK MSB, and BANK LSB settings of channel 10. Pressing this button calls up the Bank Select MSB and LSB values corresponding to the External Drum Kit of the DTX900.

The third page of the Voice Job

J FILTER Determines the value of the Brightness (Control Change num- ber 74) for each MIDI channel.

K REV SEND (Reverb Send) Determines the value of the Reverb Send Level (Control Change number 91) for each MIDI channel.

L CHO SEND (Chorus Send) Determines the value of the Chorus Send Level (Control Change number 93) for each MIDI channel.

Voice Job [SF4] VOICE

NOTE Keep in mind that the pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button (executing the

Job) is not necessary for the Voice Job.

Settings Off, All, PC

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

2

1

4

3

6

5

7 8 9

Range 1 128

Range 0 127

NOTE If you set the Bank Select for MIDI channel 10 to 125 or 127, the Pro-

gram Change number (Drum Kit number) set for MIDI channel 10 will be automatically applied to ALL other MIDI channels for the internal tone generator.

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

K

J

L

DTX900 Owners Manual 103

Reference

1

Click Mode [CLICK]

This chapter explains the Click mode called up via the [CLICK] button. In the Click mode, you can set the Click (Metronome) related parameters such as Click Voice, time signature and tempo for the entire DTX900. In addition, you can use the Groove Check function and Rhythm Gate function for rhythm train- ing and practice.

Basic Procedure in the Click Mode

1 Press the [CLICK] button to enter the Click mode.

2 Note the tab menus (corresponding to the [F1] [F5] and [SF1] [SF3] buttons) to nd the desired function, then press the relevant button to call up the desired dis- play.

3 Move the cursor to each parameter, then set the value by using the data dial, [INC/ YES] and [DEC/NO] button.

4 After setting, press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store all the settings in the Click mode, other than tempo, beat (time signa- ture) and subdivide.

All the settings in the Click mode will be lost if the power is turned off without storing.

Never attempt to turn off the power while the message Please keep power on is shown on the display; otherwise, all the settings in the Click mode may be lost.

NOTICE

04 DTX900 Owners Manual

Click Mode [CLICK]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Basic Settings of the Click Sound [F1] PLAY

From this display, you can set the basic parameters of the Click sound such as Voice, time signature and tempo.

1 BEAT (Time Signature) Determines the time signature of the Click sound.

B TEMPO Determines the tempo of the Click sound.

C SUBDIVIDE Determines the accent beat of the Click. Beats are divided at the accent beat specied here. When BEAT is set to 5/4, SUBDIVIDE is set to 2+3, the accent is applied to the rst beat and the third beat. When BEAT is set to 9/4, SUBDI- VIDE is set to 4+5, the accent is applied to the rst beat and the fth beat.

D CLICK VOICE Determines the Click Voice.

E VOLUME (ACC) For adjusting the volume of the accent beat determined by the SUBDIVIDE parameter.

F VOLUME (quarter note) Determines the volume of click timing for quarter notes.

G VOLUME (eighth notes) Determines the volume of click timing for eighth notes.

H VOLUME (sixteenth notes) Determines the volume of click timing for sixteenth notes.

I VOLUME (eighth note triplet) Determines the volume of click timing for eighth note triplet notes.

NOTE The note types shown in VOLUME will differ depending on the BEAT settings.

2

987654

1

3

Settings 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

NOTE When a Song having a different Beat (time signature) setting is

selected in the Song mode, the Beat of the new Song is applied also to the Click sound.

Settings 030 300

NOTE When a Song having a different tempo setting is selected in the Song

mode, the tempo value of the new Song is applied also to the Click sound.

The tempo can also be set using the Tap Tempo function, letting you set the tempo by tapping it on a pad. With this, you can conveniently set the tempo to one that feels best to you. For details, see page 34.

Settings off, 2+3, 3+2, 3+4, 4+3, 4+5, 5+4, 5+6, 6+5, 6+7, 7+6, 7+8, 8+7

Settings Metronome, Claves, Cowbell, Shaker, Stick, CrossStick, Pulse, Human, UserVoice

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

Range 0 127

DTX900 Owners Manual 105

Click Mode [CLICK]

Reference

1

Click Voice Settings [F2] VOICE

From this display (available only when the Click Voice is set to User Voice), you can set a different Click Voice for each beat timing.

1 Voice category Determines the voice category for the click sound.

B Voice number Determines the voice number for the click sound. If the voice number is set to 000, the indication no assign is shown for the voice name and no sound will be produced.

C TUNING Determines the pitch of the Voice specied at 2.

Tap Tempo Function [F3] TAP

The Tap Tempo function is described in the Quick Guide section on page 34.

Groove Check Function [F4] GROOVE

Explanations about this display are described in the Quick Guide section on page 51.

Explanations about this display are described in the Quick Guide section on page 52.

Explanations about this display are described in the Quick Guide section on page 50.

Settings kick1 2, snare1 3, tom1 2, cymbal, hihat, perc1 2, efct1 2, USR-A H

2 31

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

NOTE The amount of Voices differs depending on the selected Voice cate-

gory.

Range -24.00 +24.00 (1.0 indicates one semi- tone.)

NOTE A User Voice assigned to a Click Voice will be played back with just

one shot, even if the User Voice is set to loop in the Sampling mode. When you want to use the Click Voice having a User Voice, it is a

good idea to save the le including your desired User Voice in the AUTOLOAD folder (page 125) of the USB storage device and use the Auto Load function (page 125).

Performing the Groove Check [SF1] G.CHECK

Performing the Rhythm Gate [SF2] R.GATE

Parameter Settings for the Groove Check and Rhythm Gate

[SF3] SETTING

06 DTX900 Owners Manual

Click Mode [CLICK]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Click Sound Settings [F5] OTHER

From this display, you can set the parameters which deter- mine under what circumstances the click and the output for the click sound.

1 Mode Determines how and under what circumstances the click is played. The click can be started or stopped in synchronization with song playback/recording according to the setting here, as well as by pressing the [CLICK ON/OFF] button.

manual The Click is started/stopped only by pressing the [CLICK ON/OFF] button.

play The Click is started/stopped by starting/stop- ping the Song playback, as well as by pressing the [CLICK ON/OFF] button.

rec The Click is started/stopped by starting/stop- ping the Song recording, as well as by pressing the [CLICK ON/OFF] button.

play&rec The Click is started/stopped by starting/stop- ping the Song playback/recording, as well as by pressing the [CLICK ON/OFF] button.

B MIDI Out Determines whether or not the MIDI note number corre- sponding to the Click Voice is transmitted via MIDI OUT. When this parameter is set to on, the following MIDI events are transmitted via MIDI OUT.

C OutputSel (Output Select) Determines the output jack for the click sound.

From this display, you can set the parameters related to the Measure Break function. By using this function, the Click Voice can be played back for specied measures and muted for specied measures repeatedly. This function can be effectively used to bring your rhythm technique and timing up to a higher levelletting you play a certain drum phrase for several measures while listening to the Click Voice, then play the next several measures with no Click sound. For example, to have four measures with the Click Voice followed by four measures without, set the Measure parameter to 4 and the Break parameter to 4.

1 Measure/Break Determines whether the Measure Break function is active or not. When set to on, the Click Voice is played back for mea- sures specied at 2 and muted for measures specied at 3 repeatedly.

B Measure Determines the amount of measure range within which the Click sound is played (not muted).

C Break Determines the amount of measure range within which the Click sound is muted.

Setting How the Click Sound is Played [SF1] OUTPUT

Settings manual, play, rec, play&rec

MIDI channel Note Velocity

Accent note 10 B#-1 127

1/4 note 10 C0 127

Other notes 10 B-1 127

Settings off, on

NOTE The MIDI note events corresponding to the Click sound will be trans-

mitted via MIDI OUT only when the Click sound is produced. The MIDI note events corresponding to the Click sound for which the Vol- ume is turned down to the minimum level on the [F1] PLAY display will not be transmitted via MIDI OUT. Likewise, the MIDI note events cor- responding to the Click sound during Break of the Measure Break function will not be transmitted via MIDI OUT.

Settings

L&R+ph (OUTPUT and PHONES), Phones (PHONES), L&R (OUTPUT), ind1&2 ind5&6 (INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 and 2 5 and 6), ind1 ind6 (one of the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUTs)

1 32

Using the Measure Break Function [SF2] MEASBRK

Settings off, on

Range 1 9

Range 1 9

1 32

DTX900 Owners Manual 107

Reference

1

Trigger Mode [TRIGGER]

This chapter explains the Trigger mode called up via the [TRIGGER] button. In the Trigger mode, you can set the parameters related to the trigger signals received from the pads or Drum Triggers (such as Yamaha DT20) which are connected to the Trigger Input jacks. These settings let you optimize the DTX900 for best operation and response to the trigger signals. If you are using drum triggers attached to acoustic drums, or pads youve bought separately, youll need to adjust the sensitivity and assign Voices to the individual Trigger Input Sources. This mode also has settings that help prevent crosstalk* and double triggering*.

* Crosstalk A triggering problem in which the vibration generated by hitting a certain pad may cause unwanted triggering in another (usually adjacent) pad.

* Double triggering A triggering problem in which two or more trigger signals may be generated simply by hitting a certain pad once.

Basic Procedure in the Trigger Mode

1 Press the [TRIGGER] button to enter the TRIGGER mode.

2 Note the tab menus (corresponding to the [F1] [F5] and [SF1] [SF2] buttons) to nd the desired function, then press the relevant button to call up the desired dis- play.

3 Move the cursor to each parameter, then set the value by using the data dial, or [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

4 After setting, press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The following display will appear.

5 Select the destination Trigger Setup num- ber by using the data dial.

6 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The following display prompts you for conrmation before executing the store operation.

7 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation.

NOTE Creating an appropriate Trigger Setup is necessary to get optimum results and obtain the expected response and sound when

you hit the pads. One good way to ensure this is to nd an exisiting Trigger Setup close to your favorite one, then edit it. Once you have found or created your favorite Trigger Setup, it is a good idea to assign the Trigger Setup number to the TriggerNo

parameter in the display called up via the [UTILUITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF4] STARTUP. In this way, you can have your favor- ite Trigger Setup number automatically called up every time you turn the power on.

Refer to page 22 for details about the [SF6] Input Lock.

NOTE The Trigger Input jack, the level of the Trigger Signal and velocity are

shown at the top of the display when one of the [F1] [F4] displays is called up.

Destination Trigger Setup number

The edited Trigger Setup will be lost when selecting a different Trigger Setup or turning the power off. Make sure to store the Trig- ger Setup data to internal memory by pressing the [ENTER/ STORE] button before selecting a different Trigger Setup or turn- ing the power off.

Never attempt to turn off the power while the message Please keep power on is shown on the display; otherwise, all the settings in the Trigger mode may be lost.

NOTICE

NOTICE

08 DTX900 Owners Manual

Trigger Mode [TRIGGER]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Selecting the Trigger Setup [F1] SELECT

Explanations about this display is described in the Quick Guide section on page 22.

Selecting the Pad Type [F2] TYPE

From this display, you can set the type of pad or drum trigger connected to the Trigger Input jack. Make sure to select the appropriate type matching to the particular pad or drum trigger, in order to use it at its full potential.

1 INPUT (Trigger Input jack) Determines a target Trigger Input jack. You can select the Trigger Input jack by hitting the desired pad when Input Lock (page 79) is turned off (when the L indicator is not shown at the right top of the LCD display).

B Pad Type Determines the pad type for the Trigger Input jack specied at 1. The list below shows the pad types that can be set for the connected pads or drum triggers.

Trigger Sensitivity Settings [F3] SENS

From this display, you can set the sensitivity-related parameters, which determine how the DTX900 responds to the trigger signals received via the Trigger Input jacks. In other words, the parameters here determine how the level of the trigger signal (strength of your hits) is converted to the velocity recognized by the tone generator block. Keep in mind that the level and velocity generated by hitting a pad are shown at the top of the LCD display in real time.

1 INPUT (Trigger Input jack) Determines a target Trigger Input jack. You can select the Trigger Input jack by hitting the desired pad when Input Lock (page 79) is turned off (when the L indicator is not shown at the right top of the LCD display).

B Gain Determines the gain with which the DTX900 receives the trigger signal from the pad. The higher the value, the more easily you can get sound even when hitting the pad softly.

NOTE Keep in mind that each number in the display corresponds to the number of the Trigger Input jack printed at the top of the front

panel. Above each number, the status of the trigger signal received from the pad is shown in real time.

Settings snare pad15

1

2

Settings

KP125W, KP125, KP65, XP120/100 (for snare), XP120/100 (for tom), TP120SD/100 (for snare), TP120SD/100 (for tom), TP65S (for snare), TP65S (for tom), TP65S (for hihat), TP65, PCY155, PCY135, PCY150S, PCY130SC, PCY130S/130, PCY65S/65, RHH135, RHH130, DT10/20 (for snare), DT10/20 (for HiTom), DT10/20 (for LoTom), DT10/20 (for Kick), TRG Snare, TRG HiTom, TRG LoTom, TRG Kick

NOTE When XP120SD/T, XP100SD/T, TP120SD/100 or TP65S is used as a

snare pad, set the pad type to for snare. As the sensitivity of the closed rim shot section increases, the closed rim shot will become easier to sound.

51 23 4

Settings snare pad15

Range 0 63

DTX900 Owners Manual 109

Trigger Mode [TRIGGER]

Reference

1

C Curve Determines how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the level (strength) with which you hit the pad. The loud2 curve, for example, provides increased response, especially for lower velocities. The hard2 curve, for example, effectively lessens the overall response compared to the other curves.

D LEVEL Determines the level range within which the velocity is changed. If the trigger signal is below the minimum level set here, no sound is produced. Even if the trigger signal exceeds the max- imum level, the sound is produced with the maximum veloc- ity and no greater.

E VEL (Velocity) Determines the velocity range within which the Voice sound is produced.

Setting the Rejection [F4] REJECT

From this display, you can set the Rejection-related parameters, letting you prevent false hitssuch as double triggering caused by stick rebounds, and crosstalk cause by pad vibration. The trigger signals regarded as false hits will be ignored by proper setting of the Rejection parameters.

1 INPUT (Trigger Input jack) Determines a target Trigger Input jack. You can select the Trigger Input jack by hitting the desired pad when Input Lock (page 79) is turned off (when the L indicator is not shown at the right top of the LCD display).

B Reject Time Determines the amount of time within which the current Trig- ger Input jack will not accept new trigger signals from the moment receiving the previous trigger signal. The setting here prevents unexpected sounds generated via double triggering.

C Reject Level From ALL Determines the minimum level of the trigger signals (gener- ated by hitting any other pads) which the current Trigger Input jack will accept. In other words, the current Trigger Input jack will not accept trigger signals (generated by hitting any other pads) having a level lower than that specied here. The higher the value, the less unexpected sounds are gener- ated via crosstalk.

D Reject Level From *** Determines the specic Trigger Input jack and the minimum level of the trigger signals (generated by hitting the pad corre- sponding to the Trigger Input jack specied here) which the current Trigger Input jack will accept. In other words, the cur- rent Trigger Input jack will not accept trigger signals (gener- ated by hitting the pad corresponding to the Trigger Input jack specied here) having a level lower than that specied here. The higher the value, the less unexpected sounds are gener- ated by crosstalk between the pad corresponding to the cur- rent Trigger Input jack and the pad corresponding to the Trigger Input jack specied here.

Settings loud2, loud1, normal, hard1, hard2

loud2

V el

oc ity

Level (Strength of your pad hitting)

loud1 norm hard1 hard2

Range minimum level: 0% 99%, maximum level: 1% 100%

Range minimum velocity: 0 126, maximum velocity: 1 127

Settings snare pad15

Range 4ms 500ms

Range 0% 99%

1 3

4

2

Range 0% 99%

Settings snare, tom1-4, ride, crash1-2, hihat, kick, pad11-15, tom1&2, tom1&3, tom2&3, tom2&4, tom3&4, tom2&3&4, tom all, cym all

Setting example for preventing Crosstalk When the Crash1 sound is triggered even though only TOM1 is hit:

1. Set INPUT to crash1, set Reject Level From *** to tom1, then turn Input Lock (page 79) to on by pressing the [SF6] but- ton.

1 Input Lock4

10 DTX900 Owners Manual

Trigger Mode [TRIGGER]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Other Settings [F5] OTHER

You can enter a name of up to 12 characters for the Trigger Setup currently being edited. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

1 [SF6] LIST When the cursor is located on the Name box, you can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] LIST button and enter the name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

From this display, you can copy a Trigger Setup (from a specic Trigger Input jack of a specic Trigger Setup num- ber) to the same or different Trigger Input jack of the same or different Trigger Setup number. For example, if you want to copy the Trigger Setup of the TOM1 jack to TOM4 within the current Trigger Setup, set the copy source to Current and tom1, then set the copy destination to Current and tom5, and execute the Copy operation. The Copy operation can be executed by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button after making the parameter set- tings.

1 Trigger Setup number as copy source Determines the Trigger Setup number as copy source. Cur- rent refers to the currently edited Trigger Setup.

B Trigger Input jack as copy source Determines the Trigger Input jack as copy source.

C Trigger Setup number as copy destination Determines the Trigger Setup number as copy destination. Current refers to the currently edited Trigger Setup.

D Trigger Input jack as copy destination Determines the Trigger Input jack as copy destination.

2. Adjust the tom1 value of Reject Level From so that the Crash1 sound is not triggered, even if hitting the pad connected to the TOM1 jack. The higher the value, the less likely the Crash1 sound will be accidentally triggered.

3. After nding and setting the appropriate value, store the setting as a User Trigger Setup and turn Input Lock off so that you can play the drum performance.

NOTE If the tom1 value of the Reject Level From is too large, the Crash1

sound may not be triggered properly when you hit both the Crash1 and Tom1 at the same time.

Naming the Trigger Setup [SF1] NAME

Copying the Trigger Setup [SF2] COPY

1

When the Trigger Setup Copy operation is executed, the destination Trigger Setup will be replaced with the settings of the copy source.

When setting the copy destination to Current and executing the Copy operation, make sure to store the current Trigger Setup by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button on another display. This is necessary because the edited Trigger Setup will be lost when selecting a different Trigger Setup or when turning the power off; it also is necessary since the Store operation cannot be performed from the [SF2] COPY display.

Settings Current, PRE: 01 USR: 05

Settings snare pad15

Settings Current, USR: 01 USR: 05

Settings snare pad15

NOTICE

NOTICE

42

31

DTX900 Owners Manual 111

Reference

1

File Mode [FILE]

This chapter explains the File mode called up via the [FILE] button. The File mode provides tools for transferring data (such as Songs and User Voices) between the DTX900 and external storage devices, such as a USB storage device or hard disk drive connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Terminology in the File Mode

File

Just as with a computer, various data types such as Drum Kit, User Voice, Song and Trigger Setup created on the DTX900 can be treated as a le and saved to an external USB storage device. Each le features a le name and le extension.

File Name

Just as with a computer, you can assign a name to the le in the File mode. Files having the same name cannot be saved in the same directory.

File extension

The three letters following the le name (after the period) such as .mid and .wav are referred to as a le exten- sion. The extension indicates the type of le and cannot be changed by the panel operation of the DTX900. The File mode of the DTX900 supports ten different extension types, according to the particular data. For details, see page 113.

File size

This refers to the memory amount of the le. The le size is deter-

mined by the amount of data saved to the le. Generally, the size of

an audio le (AIFF, WAV, etc.) is much larger than the size of a

MIDI le. On the DTX900, the size of le including the User

Voices (consisting of audio signals obtained via the Sampling

function) is much larger than other les. File sizes are indicated in

conventional computer terms by B (Byte), KB (Kilo Byte), MB

(Mega Byte) and GB (Giga Byte). 1KB is equivalent to 1024 Byte,

1MB is equivalent to 1024KB, and 1GB is equivalent to 1024MB.

Device

Refers to a memory storage unit (such as a hard disk) to which the

le is saved. The DTX900 can handle and mount various types of

USB storage devices connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Directory (Folder)

This is an organizational feature on a data storage device (such as hard disk), allowing you to group data les together according to type or application. Directories can be nested in hierarchical order for organizing data. The direc- tory is equivalent to the computer term folder. The File mode of the DTX900 allows you to assign a name to a directory as with les. Please note that the directory name does not contain an extension.

Format

The operation of initializing a storage device (such as a hard disk) is referred to as format. The File mode of the DTX900 allows you to format the USB memory storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector. The format operation erases all data from the target memory device and automatically creates an AUTOLOAD direc- tory.

Save/Load

Save means that the data created on the DTX900 is saved to an external memory device as a le, while Store means that the data created on the DTX900 is stored to internal memory. Load means that the le on the external memory device is loaded to internal memory.

12 DTX900 Owners Manual

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

File Types Compatible With the DTX900

The DTX900 supports various le types that can be saved and loaded.

File types that can be saved

File types that can be loaded

File types File extension Information

AllData .T3A All data in this DTX900s internal User Memory (Flash ROM, DRAM and optionally installed DIMM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

Utility .T3U Utility setup data in this DTX900s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

Click .T3C Click setup in this DTX900s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

AllTrigger .T3T All the Trigger Setup data in the DTX900s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

AllKit .T3K All the Drum Kit data in the DTX900s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

AllChain .T3H All the Chain data in the DTX900s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

AllSong .T3S All the Song data in the DTX900s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

AllVoice .T3V All the User Voice data in the DTX900s internal User Memory (DRAM) is treated as a single le, and can be saved to the USB storage device.

Wav .WAV A User Voice created in the Sampling mode can be saved to the USB storage device as a WAV le (Win- dows audio format).

Aiff .AIF A User Voice created in the Sampling mode can be saved to the USB storage device as an AIFF le (Mac- intosh audio format).

File types File extension Information

AllData .T3A Files of the AllData type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Utility .T3U Files of the AllData or Utility type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Click .T3C Files of the AllData or Click type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

AllTrigger .T3T Files of the AllTrigger type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instru- ment.

Trigger .T3A .T3T

A specied Trigger Setup data in a le that is saved to the USB storage device as AllData or AllTrigger type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument.

AllKit .T3K Files of the AllKit type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Kit .T3A .T3K

A specied Drum kit data in a le that is saved to the USB storage device as AllData or AllKit type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument.

AllChain .T3H Files of the AllChain type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Chain .T3A .T3H

A specied Chain data in a le that is saved to the USB storage device as AllData or AllChain type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument.

AllSong .T3S Files of the AllSong type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Song .T3A .T3S .MID

A specied Song in a le that is saved to the USB storage device as AllData or AllSong type can be indi- vidually selected and loaded to the instrument.

AllVoice .T3V Files of the AllVoice type saved to the USB storage device can be loaded and restored to the instrument.

Voice .T3A .T3V

A specied Voice in a le that is saved to the USB storage device as AllData or AllVoice type can be indi- vidually selected and loaded to the instrument.

Wave .WAV .AIF

WAV les (extension: .WAV) or AIFF les (extension: .AIF) can be loaded to the User Voice.

DTX900 Owners Manual 113

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

1

Saving a File [F1] SAVE

After connecting the USB storage device to the instrument,

follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F1] SAVE button to call up the Save display.

1 TYPE Among the various types of data created on this instrument, you can save all of them or data created in each mode to a sin- gle le. This parameter determines which specic type of data will be saved to a single le.

B File name input location You can enter a name of up to eight characters for the le you are about to save. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

C Current Indicates the current directory (folder). This indication is automatically changed according to the current directory (folder) specied in the File/Directory (Folder) selection box. The root directory is the highest directory.

D File /Directory (Folder) selection box Indicates the directories and les in the current Directory. In this box, the directories and les are listed in alphabetical order. Pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button enters the selected directory (folder) while pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the next highest directory. You can distinguish the directory and le by the indicator at left end of each line.

...........Directory (Folder)

............File

E [SF1] EXEC Pressing this button saves the le to the currently selected directory.

F [SF2] SET NAME Pressing this button copies the le/directory name selected from the File/Directory (Folder) selection box to the File name input location.

G [F6] NEW Pressing this button creates a new directory named NEWDIR** within the currently selected directory. You can change this name from the [F3] RENAME display.

2 Set the desired TYPE parameter to one of the following: AllData, Utility, Click, AllTrigger, AllKit, AllChain, AllSong, or AllVoice. For details about each of the le types, see page 113.

3 Move the cursor to the le name input location, then input a le name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Opera- tion on page 15. You can call up the Character List by press- ing the [SF6] button.

4 Move the cursor to the File/Directory selection box, then select the destination directory. Pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button enters the selected directory (folder) while pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the next highest directory. When you want to save the le to the root directory and root is not shown as Current Dir at the right top of the display, press the [EXIT] button a few times to go to the root directory.

5 Press the [SF1] EXEC button to execute the Save operation. If you are about to overwrite an existing le, the display prompts you for conrmation. Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Save operation, or press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel it.

While the data is being saved, make sure to follow these precautions: Never remove or eject the media from the device (USB storage). Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. Never turn off the power of the DTX900 or the relevant devices.

Saving All User Data or All Data of a Specic Type

Settings AllData, Utility, Click, AllTrigger, AllKit, AllChain, AllSong, AllVoice, Wav, Aiff

NOTICE

431

52 76

14 DTX900 Owners Manual

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

You can save the audio data assigned to a User Voice as a

WAV le (Windows audio format) or an AIFF le (Macin-

tosh audio format). After connecting the USB storage

device to the instrument, follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F1] SAVE button to call up the Save display.

1 TYPE Among the various types of data created on this instrument, you can save all of them or data created in each mode to a sin- gle le. This parameter determines which specic type of data will be saved to a single le.

B File name input location You can enter a name of up to eight characters for the le you are about to save. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then select Wav or Aiff by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] button.

3 Move the cursor to the le name input location, then input a le name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Opera- tion on page 15. You can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] but- ton.

4 Select the destination directory for saving, if you have created any directory. Pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button enters the selected directory (folder) while pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the next highest directory. When you want to save the le to the root directory and root is not shown as Current Dir at the right top of the display, press the [EXIT] button a few times to go to the root directory.

5 Press the [SF1] EXEC button. The User Voice bank and number to be saved appear on the left half of the display. You can select the Voice including the desired audio signals.

1 User Voice bank and number Determines the User Voice bank and number which includes the audio signals you want to save as a WAV le or AIFF le.

6 Select the User Voice bank and number including the audio signals you want to save as a WAV le or AIFF le.

7 Press the [SF1] EXEC button to execute the Save operation.

Saving the Audio Data Assigned to a User Voice as a WAV or AIFF File

Settings AllData, Utility, Click, AllTrigger, AllKit, AllChain, AllSong, AllVoice, Wav, Aiff

1 2

1

DTX900 Owners Manual 115

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

1

Loading a File [F2] LOAD

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

1 TYPE Among the various types of data saved in a single le on a USB storage device, you can load all of them at once or load only a specic type of data to this instrument. This parameter determines which specic type of data will be loaded from a single le.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the desired File type to one of the following: AllData, AllTrigger, AllKit, AllChain, AllSong, or AllVoice. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 Press the [SF1] EXEC button to execute the Load operation.

The Load operation overwrites any data previously existing in the des- tination internal memory. Important data should always be saved to a USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

While the data is being loaded, make sure to follow these precautions: Never remove or eject the media from the device (USB storage). Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices. Never turn off the power of the DTX900 or the relevant devices.

Loading All User Data or All Data of a Specic Type

Settings AllData, Utility, Click, AllTrigger, Trigger, AllKit, Kit, AllChain, Chain, AllSong, Song, AllVoice, Voice, Wave

NOTICE

NOTICE

1

16 DTX900 Owners Manual

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

You can also load a single, specic Drum Kit from the le (File extension: .T3A or T3K) to the desired User Drum Kit number.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Kit. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button so that the Drum Kits included in the selected le are shown in the Directory/File list box.

5 Move the cursor to the desired Drum Kit then press the [SF1] EXEC button. The Drum Kit number and name for the Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

6 Select the User Drum Kit number for the Load destination.

7 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

You can also load a single, specic Song from the le (File extension: .T3A or .T3S) to the desired User Song number.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Song. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button so that the Songs included in the selected le are shown in the Directory/File list box. Empty Songs (having no data) are not shown in the Directory/ File list box.

5 Move the cursor to the desired Song then press the [SF1] EXEC button. The Song number and name for the Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

6 Select the Song number for the Load des- tination.

7 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

Loading a Specic Drum Kit From an All Data or All Kit File

Loading a Specic Song From an All Data or All Song File

DTX900 Owners Manual 117

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

1

You can also load a single, specic Trigger Setup from the le (File extension: .T3A or .T3T) to the desired Trigger Setup number.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Trigger. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button so that the Trigger Setups included in the selected le are shown in the Directory/File list box.

5 Move the cursor to the desired Trigger Setup as Load source then press the [SF1] EXEC button. The Trigger Setup number and name for the Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

6 Select the Trigger Setup number for the Load destination.

7 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

You can also load a single, specic Chain from the le (File extension: .T3A or .T3H) to the desired Chain number.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Chain. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button so that the Chains included in the selected le are shown in the Directory/File list box.

5 Move the cursor to the desired Chain as Load source then press the [SF1] EXEC button. The Chain number and name for the Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

6 Select the Chain number for the Load des- tination.

7 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

Loading a Specic Trigger Setup From an All Data or All Trigger File

Loading a Specic Chain From an All Data or All Chain File

18 DTX900 Owners Manual

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

You can also load a single, specic Voice from the le (File extension: .T3A or .T3V) to the desired User Voice num- ber.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Voice. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button so that the Voices included in the selected le are shown in the Directory/File list box. Empty Voices (having no audio signal) are not listed in the Directory/File list box.

5 Move the cursor to the desired Voice as Load source then press the [SF1] EXEC button. The Voice number and name for the Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

6 Select the User Voice bank and number for the Load destination.

7 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

Any audio data created and edited on a computer and saved in the WAV or AIFF format can also be used as material for a User Voice on the DTX900. After connect a USB storage device containing the desired WAV/AIFF audio les then follow the instructions below.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Wave. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 After selecting the le, press the [SF1] EXEC button. The User Voice bank, number and name as Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

5 Select the User Voice bank and number as Load destination.

6 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

Loading a Specic Voice From an All Data or All Voice File

Loading WAV or AIFF Audio Files to Create a User Voice

NOTE The WAV/AIFF le can be loaded is only 16bit (sample size). An error message appears when you try to load an unavailable le.

DTX900 Owners Manual 119

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

1

A Standard MIDI le (a common le format with the le extension: .MID for MIDI sequence data, also called MIDI le or SMF) format 0 can be loaded from the USB storage device to the DTX900 and can be used as a User Song.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F2] LOAD button to call up the Load display.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the File type to Song. Only available les according to the Type are listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the MIDI le (Extension: .MID) to be loaded. You can select any of the les listed in the Directory/File list box on the display.

4 After selecting the MIDI le, press the [SF1] EXEC button. The User Song number and name for the Load destination appear on the left half of the display.

5 Select the User Song number for the Load destination.

6 Press the [SF1] EXEC button again to exe- cute the Load operation.

Loading Standard MIDI les (SMF)

NOTE Only Format 0 Standard MIDI Files (SMFs) can be loaded. When a Standard MIDI le song (format 0) is loaded, parameters

such as volume, pan, and program change located at the very top of the song (001:01:000) are handled as header data and applied to the settings on the Voice Job display called up via [SONG] [F2] JOB [SF4] VOICE. The settings on the Voice Job are not transmitted to the internal tone generator or the external MIDI device even when the Song is started although they are transmitted to the internal tone gen- erator or the external MIDI device when the Song is selected. Because of this, the following problems may occur. When a Song that includes settings such as volume, pan and pro-

gram change somewhere in the middle is played back with the Repeat setting on (in the display called up via [SONG] [F1] PLAY, or the display called up via [SONG] [F2] JOB [SF1] SONG 03: Song Name, Tempo, Repeat) by pressing the [>/] button, the sound originally at the top of the Song may differ in sub- sequent playbacks.

When a Song that includes settings such as volume, pan and pro- gram change somewhere in the middle is played back with the Repeat setting on (in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF3] PADSONG) by using the Pad Song function (page 93), the sound originally at the top of the Song may differ in subse- quent playbacks.

To avoid the problems described above, move the parameter settings at the top of the SMF Song to a few clocks later on your computer or MIDI sequencer before executing the Load operation in the File mode. These parameter settings will then not be handled as header data, meaning that they will be properly transmitted to the internal tone generator or external MIDI device when the Song is started.

20 DTX900 Owners Manual

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Changing the Name of a File or Directory [F3] RENAME

This lets you rename the selected le/directory selected on the current drive. You can rename les using up to eight alphabetic and numeric characters. Files having the same name cannot be saved in the same directory. Files are named according to MS-DOS naming conventions. If the le name contains spaces and other characters unrecog- nized in MS-DOS, these characters will automatically be replaced by _ (underscore) characters when saving.

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode then press the [F3] RENAME button to call up the Rename display.

1 TYPE Determines the desired File type. For details about the File type, see page 113.

B File /Directory (Folder) selection box Indicates the directories and les in the current Directory. In this box, the directories and les are listed in alphabetical order. Pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button enters the selected directory (folder) while pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the next highest directory. You can distinguish the directory and le by the indicator at left end of each line.

...........Directory (Folder)

............File

C File name input location You can enter a name of up to eight characters for the le you are about to save. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

D [SF1] EXEC Pressing this button executes the rename of selected le.

E [SF2] SET NAME Pressing this button copies the le/directory name selected at the le/directory selection box to the le name input location.

F [F6] NEW Pressing this button creates a new directory in the current directory.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then set the desired le type by using the data dial, or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

3 Move the cursor to the le/directory selec- tion box, then select the desired le or directory to be renamed by using the data dial, or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] but- tons.

4 Press the [SF2] SET NAME button. The name of the selected le is copied to the le name input location.

5 Enter the new name. Follow the instructions for Inputting Characters (Naming, etc.) on page 15. You can call up the Character List by press- ing the [SF6] button.

6 Press the [SF1] EXEC button to execute the Rename operation.

1 2

4 5 63

DTX900 Owners Manual 121

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

1

Deleting a File or Directory [F4] DELETE

1 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F4] DELETE button to call up the Delete display.

1 TYPE Determines the desired File type. For details about File types, see page 113.

2 Move the cursor to TYPE, then select the File Type to which the le to be deleted belongs. For details about the File type, see page 113.

3 Move the cursor to the Directory/File list box, then select the le to be deleted.

4 Press the [SF1] EXEC button. A conrmation message will appear. Press the [DEC/NO] or [EXIT] button to cancel the Delete operation.

5 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Delete operation.

1

NOTE When you wish to delete a directory, delete all the les and folders

contained in the directory beforehand. Please keep in mind that only directories that contain no les or other nested folders can be deleted.

22 DTX900 Owners Manual

File Mode [FILE]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Formatting USB Storage Media [F5] FORMAT

Before you can use a new USB storage device with this instrument, you will need to format it. Follow the instructions below.

1 Connect a USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

2 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode, then press the [F5] FORMAT button to call up the Format display.

1 Volume Label Determines the name of the Volume Label. The Volume Label is the name assigned to the USB storage device. The Volume Label can contain up to 11 characters. For detailed instruc- tions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

B [SF1] EXEC Pressing this button executes the Format operation.

C [SF6] LIST You can call up the Character List by pressing this button. Refer to Using the character list, page 15, for more informa- tion on name entry.

3 Enter the name of the Volume Label as desired.

4 Press the [SF1] EXEC button. (The display prompts you for conrmation.) Press the [DEC/NO] button to cancel the Format.

5 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Format.

Make sure there is no important data in the USB storage device before formatting; otherwise all data will be deleted.

NOTE You can also format the USB storage device on the computer; however, for

best results and to avoid load/save errors, always use USB storage devices that have been formatted on the DTX900.

NOTICE

1

32

NOTE The format operation erases all data from the target memory device

and automatically creates an AUTOLOAD directory, see page 125.

DTX900 Owners Manual 123

Reference

1

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

This chapter explains the Utility mode called up via the [UTILITY] button. In the Utility mode, you can set parameters that apply to the entire system of the DTX900.

Basic Procedure in the Utility Mode

1 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode.

2 Note the tab menus (corresponding to the [F1] [F6] and [SF1] [SF5] buttons) to nd the desired function, then press the relevant button to call up the desired dis- play.

3 Move the cursor to each parameter, then set the value by using the data dial, or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

4 After setting, press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store the Utility settings.

General Settings [F1] GENERAL

From this display, you can make overall settings for the internal tone generator. The settings here only affect the internal tone generator block. The MIDI output will not be affected.

1 Volume Determines the overall volume for the tone generator. The lower the value, the lower the actual volume will be when set- ting the slider on the front panel to maximum.

B Pan Depth Determines the pan depth (the left and right stereo spread), maintaining the current pan balance between various parts.

C Tune Determines the ne tuning of the overall sound. You can adjust the tuning in cent increments.

From this display, you can set the output gain for individual Output jacks. The higher the value, the louder the actual volume of the sound output via the specied Output jack.

1 L&RGain Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT L/MONO, R and PHONES jacks.

B IndivOutGain Determines the output gain of the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT jacks. The setting here is applied to all the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT jacks.

All Utility settings will be lost if the power is turned off without stor- ing.

NOTICE

Tone Generator Settings [SF1] TG

Settings 0 127

Settings 1 127

Settings -102.4 0 +102.3

1 23

Output Gain Settings of the Output Jacks

[SF2] OUTGAIN

Settings 0dB, +6dB

Settings 0dB, +6dB

12

24 DTX900 Owners Manual

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

1 Play Count Enables or disables a two-measure lead-in click count before actual song playback, after you press the [>/] button.

B RecCount Enables or disables a two-measure lead-in click count before actual song recording, after you press the [>/] button.

From this display, you can set the Drum Kit number, Song number and Trigger Setup number called up automatically every time you turn the power on.

1 Drum Kit Bank Determines the Drum Kit Bank that is called up automatically every time you turn the power on.

B Drum Kit No Determines the Drum Kit number of the Drum Kit Bank spec- ied above that is called up automatically every time you turn the power on.

C Song Bank Determines the Song Bank that is called up automatically every time you turn the power on.

D Song No Determines the Song number of the Bank specied above that is called up automatically every time you turn the power on.

E Trigger No Determines the Trigger Setup number that is called up auto- matically every time you turn the power on.

1 AutoLoad Determines whether the Auto Load function is on or off. When this is on, the instrument will automatically load the les in the AUTOLOAD directory (from the USB storage device) to User memory whenever the power is turned on. When you use the Auto Load function, you must put the les of AllData, Utility, Click, AllTrigger, AllKit, All- Chain, AllSong, and AllVoice in the AUTOLOAD direc- tory. You can put only one le for each type in the AUTOLOAD directory. When an AllData le exists in the AUTOLOAD directory, only the AllData le will be loaded, and other les will not be loaded.

B LED Display Determines the information which is indicated on the LED dis- play. When KitNo is selected, the current Drum Kit number is indicated on the LED display. When tempo is selected, the current tempo value is indicated on the LED display. When mode is selected, the program number of the current mode (Drum Kit number in the Drum Kit mode, Song number in the Song mode, Trigger Setup number in the Trigger mode, Step number in the Chain mode and User Voice number in the Sam- pling mode) is indicated on the LED display.

C Tempo Link When this parameter is set to kit/song, changing the Drum Kit or Song will change the tempo value according to the set- ting of the new Drum Kit or Song. When this parameter is set to off, changing the Drum Kit or Song will maintain the tempo value even if the new Drum Kit or Song has the tempo value setting. Normally, set this to kit/song.

D IndivOutAssign Determines the specic outputs for each part.

off: Each part will be output according to the OutputSel parameter called up via [DRUM KIT] [VOICE] [OUTTUNE].

6paraOut/8paraOut: Each part will be output as follows.

Count Settings [SF3] COUNT

Settings off, on

Settings off, on

Initial Settings Called Up When Turning the Power On

[SF4] STARTUP

Settings PRE, USR, EXT-A EXT-P

Range 01 50 (01 99 when EXT is selected)

Settings PRE, USR, EXT

Range 01 99

Settings PRE: 01 USR: 05

12

231 45

Other Settings [SF5] OTHER

Settings off, on

Settings kitNo., tempo, mode

Settings off, kit/song

Part Output Jack 6paraOut 8paraOut indiv1 KICK indiv2 SNARE indiv3 TOM (Left) indiv4 TOM (Right)

indiv5 CYMBAL/HI-HAT/ MISC (Left) HI-HAT

indiv6 CYMBAL/HI-HAT/ MISC (Right) MISC

OUTPUT L/MONO CYMBAL (Left) OUTPUT R CYMBAL (Right)

Settings off, 6paraOut, 8paraOut

NOTE If you select a setting other than off, Normal voices on MIDI chan-

nels other than channel 10 will be output to the OUTPUT L/MONO and R connectors as well as the PHONES jack.

12 3 4

DTX900 Owners Manual 125

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

1

Pad Settings [F2] PAD

1 FootClosePosi (Foot Close Position) Determines the amount of time it takes to detect a foot splash (from the start of a downward press to the opening of the hi- hat controller). The smaller the value, the more narrow the virtual open position is. Larger values increase the size of the gap between the top and bottom cymbals, and this can pre- vent foot close or foot splash sounds from being produced when you operate the pedal.

B FootSplashSens (Foot Splash Sensitivity) Determines the length of time from the moment you apply a foot-splash performance to the Hi-Hat Controller to the moment the foot-splashed hi-hat sound is actually triggered. For larger values, you can play the foot-splashed sound more easily; however, slight movements of the pedal may trigger the sound inadvertently. It is a good idea to set this parameter to off if you do not play foot-splashes.

C SendHH Determines whether or not the continuous change of the sound generated by opening/closing the Hi-Hit cymbal (by pressing/releasing the Hi-Hat Controller) is transmitted as MIDI messages via MIDI OUT.

From this display, you can assign functions other than trig-

gering the drum sound to the pad (Trigger Input Source).

1 SOURCE (Trigger Input source) Determines the Trigger Input Source to which the specied function is assigned. When Input Lock (page 79) is turned off, you can select the Trigger Input Source also by hitting the corresponding section of the pad.

B PadFunc Determines the function assigned to the Trigger Input Source specied above.

Off No function is assigned. Normal operation. inc kitNo. Hitting the pad increases the Drum Kit num-

ber by 1. dec kitNo. Hitting the pad decreases the Drum Kit num-

ber by 1. inc chain Hitting the pad increases the Chain Step

number by 1. dec chain Hitting the pad decreases the Chain Step

number by 1. inc tempo Hitting the pad increases the value of the

tempo by 1. dec tempo Hitting the pad decreases the value of the

tempo by 1. tap tempo Hitting the pad three times sets the tempo

value even when the Tap display is not called up.

clk on/off Hitting the pad starts/stops Click playback.

1 TrigBypass When this parameter is set to on, the DTX900 will not accept any Trigger Signals coming from all Trigger Input Sources. This parameter is useful when you want to cancel all Trigger Signals temporarily in order to change the pad connection setup. This parameter should be set to off normally.

Hi-Hat Settings [SF1] HI HAT

Range -32 +32

Range off, 1 127

Settings off, on

Pad Function Settings [SF2] PADFUNC

1 2 3

21

Settings Refer to the Trigger Input Source List on page 61.

NOTE The Pad Function setting overcomes the Pad Song setting (page 93)

if both of them are assigned to the same Trigger Input Source.

Settings See below.

Trigger Bypass Settings [SF3] TRGBYPS

Settings off, on

1

26 DTX900 Owners Manual

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Effect Settings [F3] EFFECT

Among the entire Effect system (page 68) of the DTX900, the parameters related to the Master EQ and Master Effect can be set in the Utility mode.

From this display you can apply ve-band equalization to the entire sound of the DTX900.

1 SHAPE Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts the signal at the specied Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type atten- uates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specied Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW and HIGH frequency bands.

shelv (Shelving type) This type of EQ shape lets you attenuate/boost the signal at frequencies above or below the specied Frequency setting.

peak (Peaking type) This type of EQ shape lets you attenuate/boost the signal at the specied Frequency setting.

B FREQ (Frequency) Determines the center frequency. Frequencies around this point are attenuated/boosted by the Gain setting.

LOW When the Shape is set to shelv: 32Hz 2.0kHz When the Shape is set to peak: 63Hz 2.0kHz

LOWMID, MID, HIGHMID 100Hz 10kHz

HIGH 500Hz 16kHz

C GAIN Determines the level gain for the Frequency (set above), or the amount the selected frequency band is attenuated or boosted.

D Q (frequency bandwidth) This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics. The higher the set- ting, the smaller the Q (Bandwidth). The lower the setting, the greater the Q (Bandwidth).

E [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of the Master EQ between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (BYPASS is shown with white text in black), the Master EQ will be applied to the entire sound of the DTX900. When Bypass is turned on (BYPASS is shown with black text in white), the Master EQ will be bypassed for the entire sound of the DTX900.

NOTE For details about the Effect structure of the DTX900, see page 68.

Master EQ Settings [SF1] MEQ

Settings shelv (Shelving type), peak (Peaking type)

Low HighHi-MidMidLo-Mid

+

0

Q (frequency bandwidth)

5 bands

Gain

Frequency

2 3

1

4

5

+

0

+

0

EQ Low EQ High

Gain

Frequency

Gain

Frequency

Frequency Frequency

Range See below.

Range -12 dB +0 dB +12 dB

Range 0.1 12.0

+

0

Gain

Frequency

Frequency

+

0

0.1

12.0

Frequency

Frequency

DTX900 Owners Manual 127

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

1

1 Switch Determines whether Master Effect is applied or not to the entire sound of the DTX900.

B Type Determines the Master Effect type.

C Pre You can set various parameters in order to change how the sound is affected by the selected Effect type. This parameter lets you call up the pre-programmed settings of these effect parameters. Data List booklet for information on the parame- ters for each Effect preset.

D Effect parameter The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. Refer to page 72 for details about the Effect parameters. Refer to the sepa- rate Data List booklet for information on the parameters for each Effect type.

E PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

External Audio Settings [F4] AUXIN

You can set parameters related to audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack.

From this display, you can set parameters such as volume and pan of the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAM- PLING IN jack. These parameters are useful, for example, when playing or practicing along with a CD or other source connected to the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack.

1 Volume Determines the output level of the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack.

B Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack.

C Mono/Stereo Determines the signal conguration for the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack, or how the signal or signals are routed (stereo or mono).

L mono Only the L channel of the audio input is used. R mono Only the R channel of the audio input is used. L+Rmono The L and R channels of the audio input are

mixed and processed in mono. Stereo Both the L and R channels of the audio input

are used.

D OutputSel Determines the output jack assignment for the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack.

E Mic/Line When using the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jacks, this deter- mines the input source, microphone (mic) or line.

mic Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone, electric guitar or bass.

line Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player.

Master Effect Settings [SF2] MEF

Settings off, on

Settings Details about the Effect types are described on page 70.

13 52 4

Output Settings [SF1] OUTPUT

Range 0 127

Range L63 (far left) C (center) R63 (far right)

Settings L mono, R mono, L+Rmono, stereo

12 3 45 Settings See the table below.

LCD Output jacks Stereo/Mono

L&R+ph OUTPUT L/R and PHONES Stereo

Phones PHONES Stereo

L&R OUTPUT L/R Stereo

Ind1&2 INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 and 2 Stereo (1: L, 2: R)

Ind3&4 INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 3 and 4 Stereo (3: L, 4: R)

Ind5&6 INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 5 and 6 Stereo (5: L, 6: R)

Ind1 INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 Mono

: : :

Ind6 INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 6 Mono

Settings mic, line

28 DTX900 Owners Manual

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

From this display, you can set the parameters related to the Insertion Effect Types applied to audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack.

1 InsConnect Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed.

Ins A to B Signals processed with Insertion Effect A will be sent to Insertion Effect B.

Ins B to A Signals processed with Insertion Effect B will be sent to Insertion Effect A.

B Insertion A (Insertion A Category/Type)

C Insertion B (Insertion B Category/Type) Determines the Insertion Effect A/B type after selecting a cat- egory. From the Category column, you can select one of the Effect Categories, each of which contains similar Effect types. From the Type column, you can select one of the Effect Types listed in the selected Category.

D [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of the Insertion Effect between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (BYPASS is shown with white text in black), the Insertion Effect will be applied to the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack. When Bypass is turned on (BYPASS is shown with black text in white), the Insertion Effect will be bypassed for the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAM- PLING IN jack.

From these displays, you can set the Insertion Effect Types applied to the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAM- PLING IN jack.

1 Category

B Type From the Category column, you can select one of the Effect Categories, each of which contains similar Effect types. From the Type column, you can select one of the Effect Types listed in the selected Category.

C Pre You can set various parameters in order to change how the sound is affected by the selected Effect type. This parameter lets you call up the pre-programmed settings of these effect parameters.

D Effect parameters The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. Refer to page 72 for details about the Effect parameters. Refer to the sepa- rate Data List booklet for information on the parameters for each Effect type.

E [SF5] BYPASS Pressing this button toggles the bypass status of the Insertion Effect between on and off. When Bypass is turned off (BYPASS is shown with white text in black), the Insertion Effect will be applied to the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack. When Bypass is turned on (BYPASS is shown with black text in white), the Insertion Effect will be bypassed for the audio signals input via the AUX IN/SAM- PLING IN jack.

F PAGE > This appears when another page can be called up from the current page. Use the Cursor [M] or [N] button to call up another page.

Insertion Effect Connection Settings [SF2] INSTYPE

NOTE For details about the Effect structure of the DTX900, see page 68.

Settings Ins A to B, Ins B to A

Settings Details about the Effect categories are described on page 70.

1 42

3

Insertion Effect Type Settings [SF3] Ins A, [SF4] Ins B

Settings Details about the Effect categories are described on page 70.

3 12 6 54

DTX900 Owners Manual 129

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

1

MIDI Settings [F5] MIDI

From these displays called up via the [F5] MIDI button, you can set the MIDI related parameters. The tone generator block of the DTX900 can handle MIDI messages on 16 channels simultaneously. Among these channels, MIDI channel 10 is used to handle the Drum Voices triggered by hitting the pads.

The tone generator block of the DTX900 can play various types of Voices as well as Drum Voices by receiving Pro- gram Change messages over MIDI channels other than 10. The related parameters can be set from this display.

1 Receive10ch Determines whether or not the DTX900 receives MIDI chan- nel messages over channel 10 from the external MIDI device. When set to on, the DTX900 will receive messages over MIDI channel 10. When set to off, the DTX900 will ignore them, meaning that the sound of the DTX900 will be trig- gered only by hitting the connected pad or pressing the Audi- tion button.

B ReceivePC Determines whether or not the DTX900 receives Program Change messages from an external MIDI device. When set to on, the DTX900 will receive Program Change messages from the external MIDI device. When set to off, the DTX900 will ignore them.

C ReceivePC10ch Determines whether or not the DTX900 receives Program Change messages over MIDI channel 10 (which handles the part of the Drum Voice triggered by hitting the pads). If you want to change the Drum Kit number from the external MIDI device, this parameter should be set to on. Keep in mind that this parameter is effective only when the Receive PC parame- ter 2 is set to on.

D LocalCtrl (Local Control) This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your pad playing. Normally, this should be set to on since youll want to hear the sound of the DTX900 as you play it. When this parameter is set to off, no sound is produced even if you hit the pads, but the corresponding MIDI messages will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will respond to mes- sages received via MIDI. You may want to set this to off when you are recording your drum performance as MIDI data to another device, such as a sequencer or DAW.

Setting Program Change Reception On/Off

[SF1] SWITCH

Settings off, on

NOTE MIDI channel messages include Note on/off, Program Change, Con-

trol Change, Pitch Bend Change, and so on.

Settings off, on

Settings off, on

12 3 4 Settings off, on

30 DTX900 Owners Manual

Utility Mode [UTILITY]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Song or Click playback of the DTX900 can be synchro- nized with the external MIDI clock coming from the MIDI device connected to the DTX900. (Song or Click conven- tionally plays according to the internal clock.) From this display, the related parameters can be set.

1 MIDI Sync Determines whether Song playback will be synchronized to the instruments internal clock or an external MIDI clock.

Internal Synchronization to internal clock. Use this set- ting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other equipment.

MIDI MIDI Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI.

B ClockOut Determines whether MIDI clock (F8H) messages will be transmitted from the DTX900 via MIDI.

C SeqCtrl Determines whether Sequencer Control signals start (FAH), continue (FBH), and stop (FCH) will be received and/or transmitted via the MIDI OUT/USB terminal.

off Not transmitted/recognized. In Recognized but not transmitted. out Transmitted but not recognized. in/out Transmitted/recognized.

1 MIDI IN/OUT Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data.

B ThruPort When using the USB terminal for MIDI transmission/recep- tion, you can have the DTX900 respond to MIDI data over one port, while relaying the data for another port number (which can be set here) to a separate tone generator (con- nected to the MIDI OUT terminal).

C Merge This parameter allows you to mix incoming MIDI data (received via MIDI IN) with MIDI data generated on the DTX900, and output them together from MIDI OUT. Merge is enabled when this is set to on. This parameter is useful when you want to control a MIDI tone generator connected to the DTX900 by playing a different MIDI keyboard connected to the DTX900 and playing the drum pads at the same time.

D DeviceNo. Determines the device number used by the DTX900 in receiv- ing or transmitting data. This number must match the device number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/ receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other system exclu- sive messages.

all When this is selected, system exclusive mes- sages for all MIDI device numbers are received. The DTX900 is recognized as Device Number 1.

off When this is selected, system exclusive mes- sages such as bulk dump and parameter change cannot be transmitted or received. When you try to execute transmission or recep- tion of system exclusive messages, an error message appears.

Resetting the User Memory to the Initial Factory Settings [F6] FACTSET

The original factory settings of the DTX900s User Memory (page 76) can be restored. For details and instructions, see page 23.

MIDI Sync Settings [SF2] SYNC

Settings internal, MIDI

NOTE When the MIDI Sync parameter is set to MIDI, make sure that the

external MIDI equipment or computer connected to the DTX900 can transmit MIDI clock data.

Settings off, on

Settings off, in, out, in/out

1 2 3

MIDI Other Settings [SF3] OTHER

Settings MIDI, USB

Settings 1, 2

Settings off, on

Settings 1 16, all, off

1 2 34

DTX900 Owners Manual 131

Reference

1

Chain Mode [CHAIN]

This chapter explains the Chain mode called up via the [CHAIN] button. In the Chain mode, you can program Chains, each consisting of up to 64 Steps and each of which has its own Drum Kit number, Song number or Click settings (only tempo and time signature). Each Step of the programmed Chain can be called up in order one by one by selecting a Step number in the [F1] SELECT display in the Chain mode or hitting the pad to which the inc chain or dec chain operation is assigned as the Pad Function (page 126) in the Utility mode. By using the Chain feature, for example, you can arrange different Drum Kits to be selected in your desired order to match your live performance, or you can arrange the different Songs to be selected in order of difculty to suit your practice needs. The DTX900 can memorize up to 64 Chains for recalling them instantly recall whenever you want.

Using a Programmed Chain [F1] SELECT

From this display, you can use a Chain programmed from the [F2] EDIT display, and call up Steps in the Chain one by one.

1 Press the [CHAIN] button to enter the Chain mode.

2 Press the [F1] SELECT button to call up the Chain Select display.

1 NUMBER (Chain number) Determines the Chain number.

B STEP Determines the Step number of the selected Chain.

C KIT Indicates the currently specied Drum Kit number and name.

D SONG Indicates the currently specied Song number and name.

E CLICK Indicates the currently specied tempo and time signature.

3 Move the cursor to the Chain number, then select the desired Chain by using the data dial, or the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] but- tons. Selecting the Chain number calls up the settings programmed for Step 01.

4 Use the selected Chain program. To start/stop the Song or Click programmed in each

Step: Each Step of the Chain does not start a Song or Click, but simply calls up the specied Drum Kit, Song number or Click settings. Pressing the [>/] button starts/stops the Song while pressing the [CLICK ON/OFF] button to starts/stops the Click.

To change the Step number: Two methods are available. You can change the Step number from the [F1] SELECT dis- play by moving the cursor to STEP, then using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. This method is available only in the Chain mode. You can change the Step number also by hitting the pad to which inc chain or dec chain has been assigned as the Pad Function (in the display called up via the [UTILITY] [F2] PAD [SF2] PAD FUNC.) This method is available in any mode. It is a good idea to use this method when you want to change the Chain Step number quickly as you perform.

Settings 01 64

Settings 01 64

2

3 4 5

1

NOTE If you select a Step to which JUMP is assigned, the Step switches to

the specied different Chain number. If you select a Step which is grouped with other different Steps, all

settings of the grouped Steps are called up simultaneously.

32 DTX900 Owners Manual

Chain Mode [CHAIN]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Programming a Chain [F2] EDIT

From this display, you can program a Chain by setting the parameters for each Step.

1 In the Chain Select display, move the cur- sor to the chain number, then select the desired Chain number by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

2 Press the [F2] EDIT button to call up the Chain Edit display.

1 STEP Indicates the Step number. You can use the checkbox when you want to group a few Steps together. For details about Step Grouping, see page 134.

B TYPE Determines the type of data called up when the corresponding Step is selected. Selecting KIT or SONG calls up the respective Drum Kit number or Song number shown at right. Selecting CLICK calls up the tempo and time signature (BEAT) shown at right. When JUMP is selected, the Chain sequence switches to the Chain number shown at right. When END is selected, the Chain program ends when the corre- sponding Step is selected.

C KIT NO./ SONG NO./ TEMPO and BEAT/CHAIN NO.

The indication of this column differs depending on the selected TYPE. When TYPE is set to KIT, this column determines the Drum Kit number called up when the corre- sponding Step is selected. When TYPE is set to SONG, this column determines the Song number called up when the cor- responding Step is selected. When TYPE is set to CLICK, this column determines the tempo and time signature called up when the corresponding Step is selected. When TYPE is set to JUMP, this column determines the Chain number called up when the corresponding Step is selected.

3 Program the Chain. Setting the parameters for each Step Move the cursor to Step 01, then set the desired TYPE by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons. When setting TYPE to KIT, move the cursor and select the desired Drum Kit bank and number. When setting TYPE to SONG, select the desired Song number. When setting TYPE to CLICK, select the desired tempo and time signature (BEAT). When setting TYPE to JUMP, select the desired Chain number. In the same manner, continue making settings for the rest of the steps as desired.

Step Grouping If you want to call up multiple Steps simultaneously (for example, if you want to call up a specic Drum Kit number and Song number simultaneously), you can use the Step Grouping function by entering checkmarks to the appropriate boxes at the left of the Step number. For details, see below.

Jumping to a different Chain Each Chain can contain up to 64 Steps. However, if you want to make more than 64 Steps, you can use the Jump function which allows you link the currently edited Chain to a different Chain. Set the TYPE to JUMP then set the desired Chain number for the Jump destination in the right column.

4 After making the desired Step settings, move the cursor to the Step just after the last Step programmed, then set TYPE to END. This operation is necessary in order to avoid calling up unnec- essary Steps. When END is assigned to a step, no Step numbers following the END step can be selected.

5 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button after completing the Chain. The following display appears.

6 Select the Chain number for the destina- tion by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] but- tons and data dial.

NOTE Keep in mind that only the checkbox of Step 1 cannot be entered.

Settings KIT (Drum Kit), SONG, CLICK, JUMP, END

21 3

DTX900 Owners Manual 133

Chain Mode [CHAIN]

Reference

1

7 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The display prompts you for conrmation. To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

8 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation.

This feature is useful when you want to call up multiple Steps simultaneously (for example, calling up the Drum Kit number and tempo simultaneously). In the [F2] EDIT display in the Chain mode, enter the checkmark(s) to the checkbox(es) at left of the Step number(s) following the rst Step number of the group.

Example 1) The Steps below are called up via 01 02 03 04 05 in order.

Example 2) The Steps below are called up via 01 and 02 03 and 04 05 in order. The settings of Steps 01 and 02 are called up simulta- neously when this Chain is selected. Selecting the next Step (Step 03) calls up the settings of Steps 03 and 04, then selecting the next Step calls up the settings of Step 05.

Example 3) The Steps below are called up via 01 02, 03 and 04 05. The settings of the Steps 01 are called up when this Chain is selected. Selecting the next Step calls up the settings of Steps 02 04 simultaneously.

Naming the Created Chain [F3] NAME

From this display, you can enter the desired name for the current Chain (up to eight characters).

1 After the Chain programming is com- pleted, press the [F3] NAME button.

2 Enter a name for the current Chain. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Opera- tion on page 15.

1 [SF6] LIST You can call up the Character List by pressing this button. Refer to Using the character list, page 15, for more informa- tion on name entry.

3 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button after making the settings.

4 Select the Chain number for the destina- tion by using the [INC/YES], [DEC/NO] but- tons and data dial.

5 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The display prompts you for conrmation. To cancel the Store operation, press the [DEC/NO] button.

6 Press the [INC/YES] button to execute the Store operation.

The edited Chain will be lost when selecting a different Chain or turning the power off. Make sure to store the Chain data to internal memory by pressing the [ENTER/STORE] button before selecting a different Chain or turning the power off.

Never attempt to turn off the power while the message Please keep power on is shown. All Chain data may be lost.

Step Grouping

NOTICE

1

34 DTX900 Owners Manual

Reference

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

The Sampling Record function lets you record soundssuch as vocals from a connected microphone, the signal from an electric guitar, or audio from an external CD or MP3 playerdirectly to the DTX900, and assign them to the DTX900 as User Drum Voices. The User Drum Voices obtained via the Sampling function can be assigned to the Drum Kit and played back by hitting the pads.

Sampling Setup

1 Turn the power off and set the GAIN knob on the rear panel to the minimum.

2 Connect an audio device (CD player, etc.) to the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack on the rear panel.

3 Turn the power of the DTX900 on.

4 Press the [UTILITY] button to enter the Utility mode, press the [F4] AUXIN button, then press the [SF1] OUTPUT button to call up the Output display.

5 Set the Mic/Line parameter. When connecting low output equipment, such as a micro- phone, electric guitar or bass, set the Mic/Line parameter to mic. When connecting high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer or CD player, set the Mic/Line parame- ter to line.

6 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store these settings.

User Voice

In addition to Preset Voices, the DTX900 has User Voices, which you can create in the following ways: Recording audio sig- nals in the Sampling mode or loading WAV les or AIFF les from the USB storage device connected to the DTX900 in the File mode.

NOTE For details about how to turn the power on/off, see page 18.

DTX900 Owners Manual 135

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

1

Sampling Operation and User Voice Assignment [F1] SELECT/[F2] SETTING

This section describes the instructions on executing the Sampling operation and creating a User Voice. The created User Voice can be assigned to the Drum Kit and played back by hitting the pad.

1 Connect a microphone or audio equip- ment to the DTX900.

2 Press the [DRUM KIT] button, and then select the Drum Kit to which you want to assign the User Voice.

3 Press the [SAMPLING] button to enter the Sampling mode. The User Voice Select display appears. From this display, you can select the User Voice number (USR-A: 001 USR-H: 127) as Sampling destination. The Sampling operation assigns the recorded audio data to the User Voice selected here.

1 User Voice Determines the User Voice to which the audio signals obtained via the Sampling operation are assigned.

B [SF1] AUDITION You can hear the currently selected User Voice by holding this button. (If the User Voice is empty, no sound will result.)

C [F6] REC Pressing this button calls up the Sampling Record Standby display.

D [SF6] INF Pressing this button indicates the amount of Sampling mem- ory used. Pressing this button again returns to the original dis- play.

1 Used/Total Indicates the amount of memory being used and the total amount available.

B Recordable Size Indicates the amount of free memory.

C Recordable Time Indicates the available Sampling time according to the available memory.

4 Press the [F2] SETTING button to call up the Sampling Setting display, then make the necessary settings. From this display, you can set the basic parameters such as recording source and sampling frequency.

1 Source (Sampling Source) Determines the input connector via which the signal to be sampled will be received.

AUX IN Analog audio from the AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jacks is recognized as the recording source.

resample Audio signal from the output of the DTX900 is received internally and recognized as the recording source.

B Mono/Stereo Determines whether new samples will be recorded as stereo or mono samples.

monoL The L-channel signal will be recorded as a mono sample.

monoR The R-channel signal will be recorded as a mono sample.

monoL+R The L-channel and R-channel signals will be mixed and recorded as a mono sample.

stereo A stereo sample will be recorded.

C Frequency Determines the sampling frequency. The rate at which digital readings are taken is referred to as the sampling frequency. Higher sampling frequencies result in higher quality sound. Normally, this parameter should be set to 44.1kHz, the highest setting. If you wish to obtain a lo- sound, select a value other than 44.1 kHz. At settings other than 44.1 kHz, the sound monitored during recording may be different from the recorded sound, depending on the source signal.

Settings USR-A: 001 USR-H: 127

2

1

43

2

1

3

NOTE Depending on the Sampling Frequency settings, the available Sam-

pling time differs as follows: 44.1kHz: 6 min. 20 sec. 22.05kHz: 12 min. 40 sec. 11.025kHz: 25 min. 20 sec. 5.5125kHz: 55 min. 40 sec. * Applied to both Mono and Stereo

Settings AUX IN, resample

Settings monoL, monoR, monoL+R, stereo

Settings 44.1k (44.1 kHz), 22.0kLo (22.05 kHz Lo-Fi), 11.0kLo (11.025 kHz Lo-Fi), 5.5kLo (5.5125 kHz Lo-Fi)

1 2 3

36 DTX900 Owners Manual

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

5 Press the [F1] SELECT button, then press the [F6] REC button. When the User Voice indicated on the [F1] SELECT display contains no audio data, the Sampling Standby display appears. When the User Voice indicated on the [F1] SELECT display contains the audio data, a conrmation message prompts you whether or not to overwrite the already recorded User Voice. If you do not want to overwrite the User Voice, press the [DEC/NO] button, select a different User Voice having no audio data, then press the [F6] REC button again.

1 TriggerMode Determines the method by which Sampling will be triggered. Normally, set this to level.

level Sampling starts as soon as an input signal exceeding the specied Trigger Level 2 is received.

manual Sampling starts soon after you press the [F6] START button. This setting lets you manually start Sampling, regardless of the input level from audio source.

B Trigger Level When the Trigger Mode 1 is set to level, youll also need to set the Trigger Level. The level set here will be indicated as a triangle in the level meter. For best results, set this as low as possible to capture the entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise.

C RecMonitor Determines the output level of the monitor for the input sig- nal. This monitor signal is output from the PHONES jack or the OUTPUT R and L/MONO jacks.

D RecGain This parameter is available only when the Source is set to resample and determines the recording gain when resam- pling. The higher the value, the greater the volume of the res- ampled sound. Before executing the Sampling (Recording) operation, you can set the appropriate gain by checking the volume via the Level Meter while hitting the pad.

E [F6] START Press this button to start Sampling. When the Trigger mode 1 is set to level, pressing the [F6] START button calls up the WAITING indication on the display, and actual Sampling does not start until the proper level signal is received. When audio signal exceeding the specied Trigger Level 2 is input to the instrument, the RECORDING indication replaces the WAITING indication and Sampling starts. When the Trigger Mode 1 is set to manual, pressing this button starts Sam- pling immediately.

6 Adjust the input sound level for optimum level. Try to set the input level as high as possible without clipping for the best sound quality. Follow the instructions below to adjust the input level.

When the Recording Source is set to AUX IN, adjust the input signal level by using the GAIN knob on the rear panel. If you cannot adjust the input level appropriately, change the Mic/Line setting (page 128) in the Utility mode.

When the Recording Source is set to resample, adjust the input signal level by setting the RecGain parameter.

7 Press the [F6] START button to start the Sampling operation. When the Trigger Mode 1 is set to manual, press-

ing the button immediately starts Sampling (a RECORDING indication appears in the display).

When the Trigger Mode 1 is set to level, pressing the button enables Sampling but does not start it (a WAITING indication appears in the display).

8 Play the sound to be sampled. When the Trigger Mode 1 is set to level and an audio sig- nal exceeding the specied Trigger Level 2 is input to the instrument, the RECORDING indication replaces the WAIT- ING indication and Sampling starts. During Sampling, a graphic representation of the recorded audio appears in the display.

Settings level, manual

Range 1 127

Range 0 127

Settings -12dB, -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB

1

5

3 4

2

DTX900 Owners Manual 137

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

1

9 Press the [F6] STOP button to stop Sam- pling. The Pad Assign display appears. From this display, you can hear the result of the Sampling operation by holding the [F3] AUDITION button and assign the recorded audio signal (or User Voice) to the Trigger Input Source (or pad).

1 Pad Assign Determines the Trigger Input Source to which the recorded audio signal (in other words, User Voice) is assigned. When no assign is selected, the recorded audio signal is not assigned to any Trigger Input Source but only to the User Voice selected on the [F1] SELECT display.

B [F3] AUDITION You can hear the recorded User Voice by holding this button. This lets you check whether the Sampling has been executed appropriately or not.

10 Press the [F3] AUDITION button to hear the sampled sound. If you are not satised with the results and you wish to try again, press the [F4] CANCEL button to return to the Standby display and try Sampling from step 4.

11 Select the desired Trigger Input Source by setting the Pad Assign parameter. The recorded audio signal (User Voice) will be assigned to the Trigger Input Source selected here instead of the previ- ously assigned Voice.

12 If you are satised with the results, press the [F5] OK button to store the sampled sound as a User voice. The [F1] SELECT display appears again.

13 If necessary, repeat steps 5 12 to assign another User Voice to a different pad.

14 Press the [DRUM KIT] button to enter the Drum Kit mode, and then press the [ENTER/STORE] button to store the Drum Kit settings. For instructions, see page 42. This makes it possible to store the User Voice Assignment as a Drum Kit. If you wish to use a User Voice obtained via Sampling, select the Drum Kit number that you have stored here.

15 Save the created User Voice data to a USB storage device. For detailed instructions on saving, see pages 55 and 114.

Settings Refer to the Trigger Input Source on page 61.

NOTE If you exit from the Sampling operation display without assigning the

User Voice to the pad, conrm that the [SOURCE] is shown in the top left of the display via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF1] SELECT, then assign the User Voice. If the [INPUT] is shown in the top left of the display, press the [SF5] button to alternate the display type to [SOURCE]. For details, see When the INPUT display is called up: on page 79.

2

1

The recorded audio data resides temporarily in DIMM (pages 76 and 147). Any data in DIMM will be lost when turning the power off. You should always save any data residing in DIMM to a USB storage device before turning off the power.

NOTICE

38 DTX900 Owners Manual

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Trimming a User Voice [F3] TRIM

From this display, you can use the Trim function to delete unwanted portions of the User Voice selected on the [F1] SELECT display, located ahead of the Start point and located after the End point.

1 Press the [SAMPLING] button to enter the Sampling mode. The Sampling Select display appears.

2 Select the User Voice to be trimmed on the [F1] SELECT display.

3 Press the [F3] TRIM button to call up the Trimming display.

1 Start (Start point) Determines the Start point for playback of the audio data included in the User Voice. The portion of the audio to the left of this point will not be played back. When the cursor is located on the Start parameter, the Start Point is indicated as a vertical full line in the waveform display. When the cursor is not located on the Start parameter, the Start Point is indicated as a vertical dotted line in the waveform display.

B Loop (Loop Point) Determines the Loop point at which loop playback starts. When the Play mode is set to loop, the audio data included in the User Voice is played back between this Loop point and the End point. When the cursor is located on the Loop param- eter, the Loop Point is indicated as a vertical full line in the waveform display. When the cursor is not located on the Loop parameter, the Loop Point is indicated as a vertical dotted line in the waveform display.

C End (End Point) Determines the End point for playback of the audio data included in the User Voice. The portion of the audio to the right of this point will not be played back. When the cursor is located on the End parameter, the End Point is indicated as a vertical full line in the waveform display. When the cursor is not located on the End parameter, the End Point is indicated as a vertical dotted line in the waveform display.

D Play Mode Determines how the selected User Voice is to be played back.

oneshot The User Voice plays back one time from Start point to End point. This setting can be used for solos, sound effects and vocal passages that are used once without looping.

reverse The User Voice plays back one time in reverse from End point to Start point. This is useful for creating reversed cymbal sounds and other special effects.

loop The User Voice plays back begins from the Start point, continues to the Loop point, then repeats indenitely between the Loop point and End point. This setting is useful for short rhythmic passages, riffs and beats that you want to play back repeatedly and continuously.

NOTE When a User Voice having no audio data is selected on the [F1]

SELECT display, pressing the [F3] button cannot call up the Trimming display.

1

6 7 8 9 J5

2 3123 4

K

Settings oneshot, reverse, loop

Start Point End Point

Start Point End Point

Start Point End Point

Loop Playback

Top Point

DTX900 Owners Manual 139

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

1

E [SF1] AUDITION You can hear the selected User Voice by holding this button.

F [SF2] LP=ST When the menu indication here is LP=ST, the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) will share the same address, meaning that both of them will be changed simulta- neously, even if just one of them is changed. Pressing the [SF2] button in this condition changes the menu from LP=ST to LPST. When the menu indication here is LPST, the Start (Start Point) and the Loop (Loop Start Point) can be changed independently. When pressing the [SF2] button in this condition, the address value of the Start will be copied to that of the Loop, with the result that both of them share the same address value. The menu indication also changes from LPST to LP=ST.

G [SF3] ZOOM

H [SF4] ZOOM + Press these buttons to zoom in and out of the waveform dis- play of the User Voice in the display.

I [SF5] SET END > Pressing this button calls up the display for determining the End Point, from which you can set the tempo, beat, and mea- sure for the audio data included in the User Voice. For details, see page 141.

J [SF6] NUM You can use the [SF1] [SF5] and [F1] [F6] buttons as number buttons by pressing the [SF6] NUM button. For details, see page 14.

K [F5] DISPLAY This menu item appears only when zooming in on the wave- form display beyond a certain point (usually several presses of the ZOOM + button). When you zoom beyond this point, the display changes to a split screen, with the left side show- ing the Start Point area and the right side showing the End Point area. Pressing the [F5] DISPLAY in this condition alter- nates between the split screen display and a display showing either the Start Point area, Loop Point area, or the End Point area (depending on which parameter has been selected).

4 Specify the playback-only portion of the audio data in the User Voice by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] but- tons. In this step, you can set the Start Point, Loop Point and the End Pointall of which determine how much of the audio will play back and how it will play back. Use the ZOOM +/- controls (as well as the AUDITION control) to adjust how much of the waveform is displayed, making it easier to spec- ify the playback-only portion.

5 If necessary, set the End Point as desired by using the display called up via the [SF5] SET END button. From the display called up via the [SF5] SET END button, set the related parameters to determine the End Point. After set- ting the parameters, press the [SF1] AUDITION button to hear the result of your settings. If you are satised with the result, press the [F6] OK button to return to the original dis- play. For details, see page 141.

6 From the [F3] TRIM display, press the [SF1] AUDITION button to hear the result of the settings. If you are not satised with the result, repeat Steps 3 5 as desired.

7 Save the created User Voice data to a USB storage device. For detailed instructions on saving, see pages 55 and 114.

The User Voice data resides temporarily in DIMM (pages 76 and 147). Any data in DIMM will be lost when turning the power off. You should always save any data residing in DIMM to a USB stor- age device before turning off the power.

NOTICE

40 DTX900 Owners Manual

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

Explanations here apply to step 5 on page 140. From the display called up via the [SF5] SET END button on the [F3] TRIM display, you can set the tempo, beat (time signature) and measure for the audio data included in the User Voice, resulting that the End Point is automatically determined. If you are satised with the result (press [SF1] to audition the result), press the [F6] OK button to return to the original display. If not, manually edit the End Point until you are satised.

1 Tempo Determines the tempo of User Voice playback. Setting the value here changes the End Point so that the length between the Start Point and the End Point matches the settings of the Beat (time signature) and Measure.

B Beat (Time signature) Determines the time signature of User Voice playback. Setting the value here changes the End Point so that the length between the Start Point and the End Point matches the set- tings of the Tempo and Measure.

C Meas (Measure and beat) Determines the length (measure and beat) of User Voice play- back. Setting the value here changes the End Point so that the length between the Start Point and the End Point matches the settings of the Tempo and Beat (time signature).

Setting the End Point by Specifying Tempo, Beat and Measure

[SF5] SET END >

Range 30 300

Settings 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16

Range Measure: 000 032 Beat: 00 15 (Varies depending on the Beat setting.)

NOTE The Measure setting here indicates the length between the Start

Point and End Point of the audio data included in the User Voice. When you wish to play two measures beginning from the Start Point of the User Voice, set the Measure parameter to 002:00.

1 2 3

DTX900 Owners Manual 141

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

1

Sampling Jobs [F4] JOB

The Sampling Job lets you process and modify User Voices you have recorded. 14 Sampling Jobs are available.

01: Normalize 06: Stereo to Mono 11: Delete 02: Time-Stretch 07: Loop-Remix 12: Delete All 03: Convert Pitch 08: Slice 13: Extract 04: Fade In/Out 09: Name 14: Optimize Memory 05: Convert Freq 10: Copy

1 From the [F1] SELECT display, select the User Voice to which the Job is applied.

2 Press the [F4] JOB button.

3 Move the cursor to the desired Job by using the data dial, [INC/DEC] and [DEC/ NO] buttons or Cursor up/down buttons, then press the [ENTER/STORE] button. The selected Job display appears.

Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the Job menu display.

4 Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then set the value by using the data dial, [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons.

5 Press the [ENTER/STORE] button to exe- cute the Job. If Are you sure? appears, go to Step 6. If not, go to step 7.

6 Press the [INC/YES] button. To cancel the Job, press the [DEC/NO] button then go back to step 4.

7 Press the [SF1] AUDITION button to hear the modied sound. At this time, the User Voice has been modied temporarily and is not xed as data.

8 Press the [F6] OK button if you are satis- ed with the result of the Job operation. If you are not satised with the result of the Job operation, press the [F5] CANCEL button and go back to Step 4.

9 Save the created User Voice data to a USB storage device. For detailed instructions on saving, see pages 55 and 114.

Basic Procedure of the Sampling Jobs

NOTE When the User Voice contains no audio data, pressing the [ENTER/

STORE] button cannot call up the Job display, depending on the selected Job.

NOTE When executing the 08: Slice Job, you will need to set additional

parameters: Select and Save To. Set these parameters, press the [ENTER/STORE] button, then press the [INC/YES] button to assign the sliced audio data to the specied User Voice. Repeat this proce- dure as desired (depending on the Subdivide setting) then go to Step 9.

You cannot return the modied User Voice to the original after x- ing the Job result. Important data should always be saved to a USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal (pages 55 and 114).

The recorded audio data resides temporarily in DIMM (pages 76 and 147). Any data in DIMM will be lost when turning the power off. You should always save any data residing in DIMM to a USB storage device before turning off the power.

NOTICE

NOTICE

42 DTX900 Owners Manual

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

The explanations here apply to Steps 4 8 of Basic Proce- dure of the Sampling Jobs on page 142.

01: Normalize

This Job maximizes (normalizes) the overall level of the specied User Voice. This is useful for bringing up the vol- ume of a User voice that was inadvertently recorded at a low level.

1 Ratio Determines the post-normalization level of the User Voice. A setting of 100% maximizes the level so that the highest peak level in the User Voice is just below clipping (maximum digi- tal signal level). Settings higher than 100% will raise the User Voice level above the maximum, producing deliberate clip- ping. Normally, set this to 100% or less.

02: Time Stretch

This Job lets you change the length of the User Voice with- out changing the pitch. By using this Job, you can synchro- nize playback of the audio data included in the User Voice with Song/Click playback, since changing the length of the User Voice also changes the playback tempo of the audio data included in the User Voice.

1 Ratio Determines the length of the post-process Voice as a ratio of the length of the original Voice (100%). The tempo change and the appropriate Ratio value can be calculated as follows. Ratio value = (original tempo/modied tempo) x 100.

B Accuracy Determines the quality of the resulting Voice by specifying which aspect of the original is to be emphasized: sound qual- ity or rhythmic feel.

sound4 sound1 These settings place emphasis on sound quality, with the sound4 set- ting producing the highest sound quality.

normal Produces an optimum balance of sound quality and rhythmic feel.

rhythm1 rhythm2 These settings place emphasis on rhythmic feel, with the rhythm2 set- ting producing the most accurate rhythmic feel.

03: Convert Pitch

This Job lets you change the pitch of the User Voice with- out changing the tempo.

1 Pitch Determines the amount and direction of pitch shift in semi- tone increments.

B Fine Determines the amount and direction of pitch shift in cent increments. 1 cent is equivalent to 1/100th of a semitone.

Sampling Jobs

Range 1% 800%

Range 1% 400%

1

1 2

Settings sound4 sound1, normal, rhythm1 rhythm2

Range -12 +0 +12

Range -50 +0 +50

1 2

DTX900 Owners Manual 143

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

1

04: Fade In/Out

This Job lets you create a fade-in for the starting portion of the User Voice and a fade-out for the ending section of the User Voice.

1 Type (Fade Type) Determines the type of level fade: fade-in or fade-out.

B Length Determines the length of the fade-in or fade-out. When a fade- in is selected, this parameter species the length of the fade starting at the specied Start point. When a fade-out is selected, this parameter species the length of the fade start- ing at the beginning of the fade and ending at the specied End point. A Length setting of 4410 is roughly equivalent to 0.1 seconds when the Frequency is set to 44.1 kHz in the Set- ting display (page 136) of the Sampling mode.

05: Convert Freq

This Job lets you halve the sampling frequency of the spec- ied User Voice. This can be used to convert hi- Voices to a lo- sound, as well as reduce the User Voice size by half.

06: Stereo to Mono

This Job lets you convert a stereo User Voice to a mono User Voice.

1 Type Determines which channel, or both channels, of the stereo User Voice will be converted to a mono User Voice.

L+R>mono The left and right channels of a stereo Sam- ple are mixed and converted to a mono Sam- ple.

L>mono The left channel of a stereo Sample is con- verted to a mono Sample.

R>mono The right channel of the stereo sample is con- verted to a mono sample.

07: Loop-Remix

This Job lets you automatically cut the audio data included in the User Voice into separate slices and randomly rear- range the slices for special effects and unusual rhythmic variations.

1 Type Determines the degree to which the looped portion of the User Voice will be sliced.

B Variation Determines how the original User Voice is varied by this Job.

normal1 2 These settings slice and rearrange the User Voice data, without performing any other audio changes.

reverse1 2 In addition to slicing and rearranging, these settings reverse the playback of some of the slices.

Settings in (fade-in), out (fade-out)

Range 00000000 End point

1 2

Fade In

Fade Out

Length

End point

Length

Start point

Settings L+R>mono, L>mono, R>mono

Settings 1 4

Settings normal1 2, reverse1 2

1

1 2

44 DTX900 Owners Manual

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

D ru

m K

it m

od e

R ef

er en

ce S

on g

m od

e C

lic k

m od

e Tr

ig ge

r m

od e

F ile

m od

e U

til ity

m od

e C

ha in

m od

e S

am pl

in g

m od

e

08: Slice

This Job lets you divide the audio data included in the cur- rent User Voice into separate slices and assign them to the different User Voices. This Job consists of two displays. The rst display shown before executing the Slice operation lets you set how the audio data is divided while the second display shown after executing the Slice operation lets you assign the created slice to a different User Voice.

The rst display (for setting the related parameters)

1 Type Determines the type that best suits the original phrase. Speci- es how the User Voice is sliced, and to some extent deter- mines the resulting sound quality.

beat This slice type is suited for percussive phrases such as drums or bass with a fast attack and short decay.

phrase1 4 Ideal for phrases containing cymbals or other instruments with a long decay.

quick Regardless of the phrase content, the audio data included in the User Voice is divided at numbers specied as the Sub Divide parameter.

B SubDivide Determines the number of slices.

The second display (for setting the slice number and User Voice number as destination) From this display (which appears after executing the Slice operation), you can assign each of the slices to a different User Voice. Set the Select parameter to the desired slice number, set the Save To parameter to the User Voice num- ber as assignment destination, then press the [ENTER/ STORE] button to execute the Assignment operation. The advantage of this feature is that you can assign each rhythmic slice to be triggered by a different pad (or note number), and thus the rhythm can be reconstructed in vari- ous ways by playing of the individual slices.

C Select Determines the slice number.

D SaveTo Determines the User Voice number to which the specied slice is to be assigned.

E [SF1] AUDITION You can hear the created slice one by one by selecting the slice number 3 and holding the [SF1] AUDITION button. If you are satised with the result of each slice, assign each slice to a separate User Voice. If you are not satised with the result, press the [EXIT] button to go back to the rst display, then execute the Slice operation again.

09: Name

Use this job to enter or change the name of the current User Voice.

1 Name Determines the User Voice name (up to 10 characters). For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

B [SF6] LIST When the cursor is located on the Name box, you can call up the Character List by pressing the [SF6] LIST button and enter the name. For detailed instructions on naming, refer to Basic Operation on page 15.

Settings beat, phase1 4, quick

Range 2 16

1 2

Settings USR-A: 001 USR-H: 127

3 4

5

1

2

DTX900 Owners Manual 145

Sampling Mode [SAMPLING]

Reference

1

10: Copy

This Job lets you copy the data of one User Voice to another.

1 User Voice bank and number as Source

B User Voice bank and number as Destination Determines the User Voice banks and numbers as source and destination.

11: Delete

This Job lets you delete a specic User Voice from mem- ory.

1 User Voice bank and number Determines the User Voice bank and number to be deleted.

12: Delete All

This Job lets you delete all User Voices. After calling up this display, press the [ENTER/STORE] button to delete all User Voices.

13: Extract

This Job lets you delete from memory all unnecessary audio data included in the User Voice (located ahead of the Start Point and located after the End Point), leaving only the portion of the sample you wish to keep.

1 User Voice bank and number Determines the User Voice bank and number of which the unnecessary portion is to be extracted.

14: Optimize Memory

This Job optimizes the memory (DIMM) for Sampling. Optimization consolidates areas of used and unused (avail- able) memory to create the largest possible area of contigu- ous available memory. In some cases, the amount of remaining memory will be increased when you execute the Optimize Memory Job. After calling up this display, press the [ENTER/STORE] button to execute the Optimize Memory Job.

This operation overwrites any data previously existing at the desti- nation User Voice number.

2

1

NOTICE

1

1

46 DTX900 Owners Manual

Appendix Optional DIMM Installation

A pp

en di

x

This section explains how to install DIMM memory modules to the DTX900.

The DTX900 does not necessarily support all commer- cially available DIMMs. Yamaha cannot guarantee opera- tion of DIMMs that you purchase. Before purchasing DIMMs, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owners Manual) for advice, or visit the following website:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/drums/ed/

Yamaha recommends that you purchase DIMMs that conform to the JEDEC* standard. Please be aware, how- ever, that conformance to this standard does not consti- tute a guarantee that the DIMMs will operate correctly on the DTX900. * JEDEC (Joint Electron Device Engineering Council)

sets standards for terminal congurations within elec- tronic devices.

Use only 168-pin DIMMs of 64, 128 or 256 MB capac- ity (synchronized DRAM; PC100 or PC133).

When installing DIMMs, make sure to install them in a matched pair of the same capacity. You cannot install only one module and leave the second memory socket open. Also make sure each DIMM in the pair is of the same manufacturer and the same type. DIMMs of differ- ent makers and congurations may not work together.

When purchasing DIMMs, make sure that the DIMM design does not utilize more than 18 memory chips per module. (DIMMs comprised of more than 18 chips do not operate correctly on the DTX900.)

IMPORTANT The DTX900M comes with SDRAM built-in, and for this reason, separately-sold memory chips (DIMM) can no longer be installed.

Installation Precautions

Before beginning installation, switch off the power to the instrument and connected peripherals, and unplug them from the power outlet. Installa- tion or removal of any devices should be started ONLY after the instru- ment (and the optional hardware) returns to normal room temperature. Then remove all cables connecting the instrument to other devices. (Leaving the power cord connected while working can result in electric shock. Leaving other cables connected can interfere with work.)

Be careful not to drop any screws inside the instrument during installa- tion. (This can be prevented by keeping the optional units and cover away from the instrument while attaching). If this does happen, be sure to remove the screw(s) from inside the unit before turning the power on. Loose screws inside the instrument can cause improper operation or serious damage. If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw, consult your Yamaha dealer for advice.

Install the optional units carefully as described in the procedure below. Improper installation can cause shorts which may result in irreparable damage and pose a re hazard.

Do not disassemble, modify, or apply excessive force to board areas and connectors on optional units. Bending or tampering with boards and connectors may lead to electric shock, re, or equipment failures.

It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on optional units and other components. Touching leads or connectors with bare hands may cause nger cuts, and may also result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage.

Be careful of static electricity. Static electricity discharge can damage the IC chips on the DIMM. Before you handle the optional DIMM, to reduce the possibility of static electricity, touch unpainted metal parts or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded.

Handle the optical units with care. Dropping or subjecting them to any kind of shock may cause damage or result in a malfunction.

Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board. Touching these parts may result in a faulty contact.

Be careful not to misplace any of the screws.

Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

Compatible DIMMs

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTICE

DIMM Type and DIMM Conguration

64MB x 2 = 128MB 128MB x 2 = 256MB

256MB x 2 = 512MB

DTX900 Owners Manual 147

Optional DIMM Installation

Appendix

1

1 Turn the DTX900 power off, and discon- nect the power cord.

2 Turn over the DTX900 so you can have direct access to the underside. To protect the data dial and sliders from damage, place the DTX900 so the four corners are supported by something that provides sufcient support, such as magazines or cushions. Place supports at all four corners, taking care not to touch the Data dial and Sliders.

3 Remove the slot cover. Remove the screws from the slot cover by using a Phillips screwdriver.

4 Insert the two DIMMs into the DIMM sock- ets.

Location for DIMM installation

Installing the DIMM modules to the sockets

4-1 Press the ejector levers to the outside of the socket.

4-2 Insert the DIMM vertically in the socket. Press the DIMM in rmly until it snaps or locks in place.

Conrm whether or not both the levers are rmly locked.

DIMM Installation

IMPORTANT Keep the removed screws in a safe place. They will be used when re-attaching the cover to the instru- ment after installing the DIMMs.

Rear panel Bottom surface of the DTX900

Slot cover

Underside of the DTX900

DIMM slot x 2

Make sure that the DIMM module is aligned correctly before you install it.

Ejector lever

Notch for alignment

48 DTX900 Owners Manual

Optional DIMM Installation

Appendix

A pp

en di

x

5 Re-install the cover you removed in step 3, in reverse order.

6 Check that the installed DIMMs are func- tioning properly. Set the DTX900 right-side up, and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack of the DTX900 and an AC wall out- let. Turn on the power, go to the Sampling mode by pressing the [SAMPLING] button, then press the [SF6] INF button (page 136). If the DIMMs have been installed properly, the appro- priate available memory size is indicated in the display.

1 Press the ejector lever until the DIMM unlocks.

2 Pull the DIMM vertically out of the socket.

NOTE When you re-install the cover, make sure to steady the cover from the

side with your hand.

NOTE If the DIMMs have not been installed properly, the Sampling function

will not work correctly. If this occurs, turn the power off, perform the instructions above again, and make sure to install the DIMMs rmly.

Memory size

Removing DIMMs

DTX900 Owners Manual 149

Appendix

1

Troubleshooting

No sound, even when the pad is hit.

Check whether or not the lamp of the TRIGGER INDICA- TOR lights when you hit the pad. If not, make sure the pads and Drum triggers (Yamaha DT20, etc.) are con- nected correctly to the input jacks of the DTX900. (page 12)

Is the DTX900 properly connected to headphones or an external audio device such as an amplier and speaker ? (page 19)

Is there a problem with the cable you are using ? Check whether or not the power of the external audio

device connected to the DTX900 is turned on. Also check whether or not the volume level of the external audio device is adjusted properly.

Check whether or not the Pad Function is assigned to the pad you hit. The Pad Function parameter setting can be conrmed in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F2] PAD [SF2] PAD FUNC. If a specic function is assigned to the corresponding pad, hitting the pad trig- gers no sound.

Check the Trigger Bypass parameter (page 126) in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F2] PAD [SF3] TRGBYPS. If this parameter is set to on, no sound is pro- duced even if you hit any pad.

Check the Local Control parameter (page 130) in the dis- play called up via [UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF1] SWITCH. If this parameter is set to off, the internal tone generator will not accept the Trigger Input Signals.

No sound or the sound volume is lower than expected.

Check whether or not the volume sliders (page 31) on the front panel of the DTX900 are set properly.

Check the Volume parameter (page 80) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT- TUNE. If this parameter value is too low, raise the value.

Check the Volume parameter (page 95) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F6] OTHER [SF1] COM- MON. If this parameter value is too low, raise the value.

Check the Volume parameter (page 124) in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF1] TG. If this parameter value is too low, raise the value.

Check the Gain and Velocity Curve parameters (page 109) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F3] SENS. No sound may be produced depending on the settings on this display.

Check the OutputSel parameter (page 81) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT- TUNE. If this parameter is set to a value other than L&R+ph, the sound of the corresponding pad is not output via the PHONES jack and OUTPUT jacks.

Check the Attack and Decay parameters (page 83) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF3] EQ-TONE. No sound may be produced depending on the settings of these parameters.

Check the Effect and Filter settings. No sound may be produced especially depending on the Filter settings.

The external MIDI tone generator produces no sound.

Is the MIDI cable (connector) properly connected? (page 20)

Make sure the MIDI Transmit Channels of the DTX900 match the MIDI Receive Channels of the connected external MIDI tone generators. For information about the MIDI settings in the Drum Kit mode, see page 96. For information about the MIDI settings during Song play- back, see page 103.

Check whether or not a specic drum instrument of the external tone generator is properly assigned to the corre- sponding MIDI note number (generated by hitting the pad connected to the DTX900). If no instrument is assigned, no sound is produced on the external tone generator even if you hit the pad.

Make sure the Trigger Bypass parameter (page 126) is set to off in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F2] PAD [SF3] TRGBYPS.

Check the MIDI IN/OUT parameter (page 131) in the dis- play via [UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF3] OTHER. If this parameter is set to USB, the DTX900 cannot communi- cate with the external MIDI tone generator connected via the MIDI cables.

Unexpected sound is produced.

Check the Pad Type parameter in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F2] TYPE. If the combination between the Input and the Pad Type is not appropriate, unex- pected sound may be produced.

When the external tone generator connected to the DTX900 via MIDI produces unexpected sound, check whether or not the Voice setting for the tone generators MIDI channel equivalent to the Transmit channel of the DTX900 is properly set.

Make sure you have not plugged the monaural phone plug or monaural pad when the power is still ON. This sets the rim switch ON on the DTX900. Turn the power OFF and ON again.

Sound is distorted.

Are the Effect settings appropriate? Use of an Effect at certain settings may produce distortion.

Check the Filter and Resonance parameters (page 83) in the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF3] EQ-TONE. Distorted sound may be produced depending on the settings of these parameters. Exces- sively high lter resonance settings can cause distortion.

Is the MASTER VOLUME set so high that clipping is occurring?

Wrong pitch or unexpected pitch.

Check the Tune parameter (page 124) in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F1] GENERAL [SF1] TG. If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, unex- pected sound may be produced.

Check the Tune parameter (page 80) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT- TUNE. If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, unexpected sound may be produced.

50 DTX900 Owners Manual

Troubleshooting

Appendix

A pp

en di

x

No effects are applied.

Check the Effect Bypass settings (page 89) in the dis- plays called up via [DRUM KIT] [F4] EFFECT. If Bypass is turned on, the corresponding Effect is not applied to the sound.

Check the Switch parameter (page 128) in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F3] EFFECT [SF2] MEF. If this parameter is set to off, the Master Effect is not applied to the sound.

Check the Reverb Send, Chorus Send and Variation Send parameters (page 80) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF2] OUT-TUNE. If these parameters are set to minimum values close to 0, it may sound as if no Effect is being applied to the sound.

Check the Reverb Send and Chorus Send parameters (page 95) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F6] OTHER [SF1] COMMON. If these parameters are set to minimum values close to 0, it may sound as if no Effect is being applied to the sound.

A Song cannot be started even when pressing the [>/] button.

Does the selected Song actually contain data? Check the MIDI Sync parameter (page 131) in the dis-

play called up via [UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF2] SYNC. If this parameter is set to MIDI, the Song of the DTX900 will play back only upon reception of external MIDI clock coming from the external MIDI sequencer or computer. In other words, the Song cannot play back even if you press the [>/] button.

Connected microphone does not work properly.

Check the Mic/Line parameter (page 128) in the display called up via the [UTILITY] [F4] AUX IN [SF1] OUT- PUT. This parameter should be set to mic when using the microphone.

Check whether the GAIN Knob (page 12) on the rear panel is set to minimum position or not.

Cannot record audio signals in the Sampling mode.

If you cannot enter the Sampling mode even though youve pressed the [SAMPLING] button, check whether DIMMs have been installed or not. In order to enter the Sampling mode, DIMM modules must be installed. (page 147)

Is there enough Sample Memory available? (page 136) Is the Sampling Source setting appropriate? (page 136) Is the Trigger Mode set appropriately? (page 137)

Computer/MIDI instrument problems.

Check the MIDI IN/OUT parameter (page 131) in the dis- play called up via [UTILITY] [F5] MIDI [SF3] OTHER. If you are connecting a computer to the DTX900 via USB, this parameter should be set to USB; if you are connecting a MIDI device to the DTX900 via MIDI, this parameter should be set to MIDI.

Cannot save data to the external USB storage device.

Has the USB storage device youre using been properly formatted? (page 123)

Is the USB storage device being used write protected? (Write-protect should be set to off for saving data.) (page 21)

Is there enough empty memory space in USB memory? To check the amount of free capacity in USB memory, press the [SF6] button in the File mode.

The Trigger Signal from the acoustic drum is not stable.

Check whether or not the Drum Trigger (Yamaha DT20, etc.) is attached to the acoustic drum with adhesive tape.

Check all the items of No sound or the sound volume is lower than expected above.

Is the cable securely connected to the Drum Trigger (Yamaha DT20, etc.) jack?

Double triggering problem.

If the connected pads have an output or velocity control volume, adjust them. It may be a good idea to lower them.

Check the Gain parameter (page 109) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F3] SENS. It may be a good idea to lower the value of this parameter.

When using acoustic drums, are you using Drum Trig- gers (trigger sensors) made by manufacturers other than Yamaha? To ensure optimum operation, use only Yamaha Drum Triggers.

When using acoustic drums, check whether or not the head of the drum is generating irregular vibration. If so, it may be necessary to mute the head.

When using acoustic drums, make sure the Drum Trigger is attached near the rim (above the bearing) and not near the center of the head.

When using acoustic drums, make sure that nothing is touching the Drum Trigger.

Try increasing the value of the Reject Time parameter (page 110) to avoid double triggering. Note that the sound of a roll or am cannot be properly produced if this parameter value is too high.

Crosstalk problem (unexpected sound is pro- duced by other pads)

When using acoustic drums, place the Drum Trigger away from any nearby drum.

Try adjusting the Reject Level parameter (page 110) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F4] REJECT.

If the pads have a level adjustment knob, adjust them. Try adjusting the minimum level parameter (page 110) in

the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F3] SENS.

DTX900 Owners Manual 151

Troubleshooting

Appendix

1

Sound is missing when performing a roll or am on the pad.

Check the Reject Level parameter (page 110) in the dis- play called up via [TRIGGER] [F4] REJECT. It may be a good idea to lower the value of this parameter.

Check the Mask Time parameter (page 94) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF4] TRIG- GER. It may be a good idea to lower the value of this parameter.

Sound is cut off.

Check the Mono/Poly parameter (page 84) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER. Set this parameter to poly.

Check the note settings in the Stack/Alternate display of the Drum Kit mode. If unnecessary notes are set, delete them.

Only one sound is produced even when two pads (drums) are hit.

Try raising the value of the Gain parameter (page 109) for the pad (Trigger Input) that is not producing sound in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F3] SENS.

Try lowering the value of the Reject Level parameter (page 110) for the pad (Trigger Input) that is not produc- ing sound.

Check the Alternate Group parameter (page 84) for both of the pads in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER. If both of the pads are assigned to the same Alternate Group, change the set- ting of either pad to a different value.

The sound volume is louder than expected.

Check the Gain parameter (page 109) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F3] SENS. Try lowering the value of this parameter.

Check the velocity curve settings (page 110) in the dis- play called up via [TRIGGER] [F3] SENS. Set the appropriate velocity curve.

Check the Trigger Velocity parameter (page 94) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF4] TRIGGER. If this parameter is set to 127, for example, the maximum volume sound is produced regardless of how soft your pad hitting may be. Change the value of this parameter to the appropriate one.

Are you using a pad made by a manufacturer other than Yamaha? Depending on the manufacturer, output levels might be too large.

The sound does not stop.

Press the [EXIT] button to stop the sound. The sound may continue when the Receive Key Off parameter is set to off in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F2] VOICE [SF4] OTHER.

The Pad Controller does not work as expected.

Check the Pad Controller Type parameter (page 92) in the display called up via [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF1] PAD CTRL. If this parameter is set to off, the Pad Controller installed to the connected pad does not work. Select the appropriate value.

Check the Pad Type parameter (page 109) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F2] TYPE. If this parameter is not set to TP120SD/100 (equipped with the Pad Con- troller), the Pad Controller does not work.

Check whether or not the rim section is pressed. If so, the Pad Controller does not work.

The Closed Hi-Hat sound is not produced even if you press the Hi-Hat Controller by foot.

Check the Pad Type parameter (page 109) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F2] TYPE. If the RHH135 or RHH130 is connected to the HI-HAT CONTROL jack as well as the HI-HAT jack, the Pad Type parameter with the INPUT set to hihat should be set to RHH135 or RHH130.

No sound results even if you hit the edge or cup section of the cymbal pad. The choke functions do not work.

Check the Pad Type parameter (page 109) in the display called up via [TRIGGER] [F2] TYPE. If this parameter is set to an improper value (such as the model name of a snare or tom pad) and the INPUT parameter at left is set to ride (to which the ride cymbal pad is connected), select the appropriate value (model name of the ride cymbal).

Hi-hat splashes are not produced.

Is the foot controller connected to the HI-HAT CONTROL jack?

Check the Foot Splash Sensitivity parameter (page 126) in the display called up via [UTILITY] [F2] PAD [SF1] HI HAT. If this parameter is set to off, the hi-hat splash sound will not be produced.

Sound is maintained even if the [>/] button is pressed during Song playback.

Check whether or not hitting the pad to which the Pad Song is assigned is recorded to the Song. If so and the Mode parameter is set to play or cutoff on the display called up via the [DRUM KIT] [F5] PAD [SF3] PAD- SONG, only the Pad Song playback cannot be stopped depending on the timing you press the [>/] button dur- ing playback. If you cannot nd the pad, you can stop the sound by changing the Drum Kit in the Drum Kit mode.

52 DTX900 Owners Manual

Appendix

Display Messages

A pp

en di

x

LCD Description

Are you sure? Conrms whether you want to execute a specied operation or not.

Cant play SMF Format 1 data. This message appears when you select and start the song with the SMF format 1 on the USB storage device. Convert the song to the SMF format 0, then play it again, since the DTX900 can handle only SMF format 0 song data.

Choose user song. This message appears when you press the [F2] JOB button in the Song mode with a Preset Song selected. When you want to call up the Job display, select a User Song.

Click stored. The settings in the Click mode have been stored.

Completed. This appears when an operation such as Load, Save, Format and other Job has been completed.

Connecting USB device... The DTX900 is currently recognizing the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE termi- nal.

Copy protected. You have attempted to export or save a copy-protected digital audio source.

USB device full. The USB storage device is full and no more data can be saved. Use a new USB storage device, or make space by erasing unwanted data from the storage device.

USB device not ready. A USB storage device is not properly inserted in or connected to the DTX900.

USB device read/write error. An error occurred while reading or writing to/from a USB storage device.

USB device write protected. A USB storage device is write protected, or you have attempted to write to a read-only medium such as CD-ROM.

Executing... A format operation or Job is being executed.

File already exists. A le having the same name as the one you are about to save already exists.

File not found. The specied le was not found on the external USB storage device during a Load operation.

Folder is not empty. You have attempted to delete a folder that contains data.

Folder is too deep. Directories below this level cannot be accessed.

Illegal le. The le specied for loading is unusable by the DTX900 or cannot be loaded in the current mode.

Illegal le name. The specied le name is invalid. Try entering a different name.

Illegal input. An invalid input or value has been specied. Check the input method or value.

Illegal sample data. The sample le specied for loading is unusable by the DTX900.

Illegal selection. An unacceptable le has been specied in the Song job mode.

Illegal song number. An unacceptable song number has been specied in the Song job mode. Select the song again.

Illegal track number. An unacceptable track number has been specied in the Song job mode. Select the track again.

Incompatible USB device. A USB device which cannot be used with the DTX900 has been connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector.

Invalid USB device. The USB storage device is unusable. Format the USB storage device and try again.

MIDI buffer full. Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data was received at one time.

MIDI data error. An error occurred when receiving MIDI data.

No data. When a Song Job was executed, the selected track or range contained no data. Select an appropriate track or range.

No DIMM memory installed. An appropriate pair of expansion DIMMs has not been properly installed, or the pair is not properly matched.

No response from USB device. There is no response from the USB device connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

No sample data. This message appears when a Sample-related Job cannot be executed because the specied Sample is not available.

Now loading... (xxxx) Indicates that a le is being loaded.

Now saving... (xxxx) Indicates that a le is being saved.

Now scanning autoloaded les. The DTX900 is currently scanning for the les specied for Auto Load.

Now working... The DTX900 is currently executing the memory arrangement after you have nished Sampling or have cancelled the Load/Save operation by pressing the [EXIT] button.

Overwrite? [YES]/[NO] This message appears when the Save operation in the File mode will overwrite data on the USB stor- age device or the Sampling operation will overwrite the User Voice containing data. This message prompts you to conrm whether it is OK to continue the operation or not.

DTX900 Owners Manual 153

Display Messages

Appendix

1

Please keep power on.

The data is being written to Flash ROM. Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM. Turning the power off while this message is shown results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze (due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM). This may also result in the DTX900 being unable to properly start up the next time the power is turned on.

Please stop sequencer. The operation you have attempted to execute cannot be done during Song playback.

Sample freq is too low. The sampling frequency is too low and the Frequency Convert Job cannot be executed.

Sample is protected. The sample cannot be overwritten because it is protected.

Sample is too long. The Sample size is too large and the Time Stretch Job cannot be executed.

Sample is too short. The Sample length is too short and the Frequency Convert Job cannot be executed.

Sample memory full. The Sample memory is full and further Sampling operations, Jobs, or load operations cannot be exe- cuted.

Seq data is not empty. This message appears if you attempt to record to a track that already contains data. Clear the track data in the Song Job mode or select a different track, then perform the Record operation.

Seq memory full. The internal memory for Sequence data is full, preventing any further operation (such as recording, Job execution, or loading from the USB storage device). Try again after erasing unwanted user song.

System memory crashed. Writing data to Flash ROM has failed.

Too many stk/alt. Displayed when the memory for Stack/Alternate is full and cannot copy the drum kit or add new steps. Free up space by deleting unwanted Stack/Alternate data, then try again.

USB connection terminated. A break in the connection with the USB storage device has occurred because of an abnormal electric current. Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB TO DEVICE connector, then press the [ENTER/STORE] button.

USB power consumption exceeded.

The power consumption of the USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector exceeds the regulated value.

USB transmission error. An error has occurred when communicating with the USB storage device.

Utility stored. The settings in the Utility mode have been stored.

LCD Description

54 DTX900 Owners Manual

Appendix

DTX900 & DTX900M Specications

A pp

en di

x

Specications and descriptions in this owners manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specications at any time without prior notice. Since specications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Tone Generator Tone Generator AWM2 Polyphony 64 notes Wave 205MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format) Voice Preset: 1,115 drum voices, 211 melody voices (GM) Drum Kit Preset: 50 kits

User: 50 kits (in the Flash ROM) External: 1584 kits (or 99 x 16, in the external USB storage device)

Effects Reverb 9 types Chorus 19 types Variation 51 types (Drum Kit) Insertion 51 types (AUX IN/SAMPLING IN) Master Effect 9 types Master EQ 5 bands

Trigger Trigger Setup Preset: 9 User: 5

Pad songs play, chase, cutoff 4 songs (max.) can be played simultaneously.

Sequencer Note Capacity Approx. 152,000 notes Note Resolution 480 ppq (parts per quarter note) Song Recording type Real time Song tracks 2 tracks Songs Demo: 3 songs

Practice: 44 songs Pad song: 40 songs User: 50 songs

Sequence Formay DTX900 Original Format, SMF format 0 Click Tempo 30 300 , Tap tempo

Beat 1/4 16/4, 1/8 16/8, 1/16 16/16 Timing Accent, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note, Triplet Click Voices Preset: 8

User: 1 Training Functions Measure break, Groove check, Rhythm gate

Sampling Samples 1,016 (for the User Voices) Sampling Sources Audio input signals via AUX IN/SAMPLING IN, Audio output signals via OUTPUT (Resample) Sample Data Bits 16bit Sampling Frequency 44.1kHz, 22.05 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 5.5125 kHz (stereo/mono) Sampling Memory DTX900: Expandable to 512 MB (i.e., 256-MB DIMM x 2)

*: The DTX900 does not come with DIMM chips built-in. DTX900M: 512 MB (SDRAM built-in)

Sample Length Mono: 32MB Stereo: 64MB

Sampling Time 44.1kHz: 6 min. 20 sec. 22.05kHz: 12 min. 40 sec. 11.025kHz: 25 min. 20 sec. 5.5125kHz: 55 min. 40 sec. *Mono/Stereo

Sample Format DTX900 Original format, WAV, AIFF Others Controllers Sliders

MASTER, PHONES, CLICK, ACCOMP., KICK, SNARE, TOM, CYMBAL, HI-HAT, MISC. Data dial

Displays 240 x 64 dot graphic backlit LCD, 7-segment LED (3-digit) Connectors MIDI IN/OUT

USB TO DEVICE/TO HOST OUTPUT L/MONO, R (standard phone jack) DIGITAL OUT (EIAJ CP1201, IEC60958, S/P DIF) INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 6 (standard phone jack) Trigger Input jacks 1 9, 12 15 (Standard stereo phone jack, L: Trigger Signal, R: Rim Switch) Trigger Input jacks 10 and 11 (Standard stereo phone jack, L: Trigger Signal, R: Trigger Signal) AUX IN/SAMPLING IN (Standard stereo phone jack) PHONES (Standard stereo phone jack) HI-HAT CONTROL (Standard stereo phone jack) DC IN 16V

Power Consumption 18W Dimensions, Weight 334(W) x 285(D) x 96(H) mm, 3.6kg Accessories AC Power Adaptor (Yamaha PA-300C, or an equivalent), Module stand, Module stand fastening

screws (4; included) Owners Manual (this document), Data List, DVD-ROM

DTX900 Owners Manual 155

1

Index

Symbols (note type icon) ...........................100

> (page) ............................................87 F (Standby/On) switch ....................12

A AC Power Adaptor ..............................6 ACCOMP slider ..........................11, 31 Accuracy .........................................143 ADD ..................................................86 ALL ...................................................87 AltGroup (Alternate Group) .............84 Attack ................................................83 AUDITION .............136, 138, 140, 145 Audition button .................................11 AutoLoad ........................................125 AUX IN/SAMPLING IN jack ..........12

B BANK ...............................................30 BANK MSB/LSB .....................96, 103 BASS .................................................39 BEAT ..........................33, 38, 105, 133 Beat ...................................45, 102, 141 Bell Shot ............................................29 Bow Shot .....................................28, 29 Break ...............................................107 BYPASS ...............89, 90, 91, 127, 129

C Cable clip ..........................................12 Category ..............................90, 91, 129 CC NUM ...........................................96 CC VALUE .......................................96 CH ...................................................103 CH (MIDI channel) ...........................86 Chain ...................................................7 [CHAIN] button ................................10 CHAIN NO. ....................................133 Checkbox ..........................................23 CHO SEND (Chorus Send) ......96, 103 Choke ................................................29 CHORD .............................................86 Chorus .........................................68, 71 Chorus Effect Category .....................89 Chorus Effect Type ...........................89 Chorus Pan ........................................89 Chorus Return ...................................89 Chorus To Reverb .............................89 ChoSend (Chorus Send) ..............81, 95 CLEAR .............................................86 Clear Song .........................................99 Clear Track ......................................101 CLICK .............................................132 Click (Metronome) ............................32 [CLICK] button .................................10 CLICK slider ...............................11, 31 CLICK VOICE ...............................105 ClockOut .........................................131

Closed Rim Shot ............................... 28 COMPRESSOR & EQ ...................... 70 Convert Freq ................................... 144 Convert Pitch .................................. 143 Copy ................................................146 Copy Destination .............................. 97 Copy Measure ................................. 101 Copy Song ......................................... 99 Copy Source ...................................... 97 Copy Track ...................................... 101 Create Measure ............................... 102 Crosstalk ......................................... 108 Current ............................................ 114 Cursor buttons ................................... 11 Curve ...............................................110 CYMBAL slider .......................... 11, 31

D Data dial ............................................ 11 Data List .............................................. 6 DC IN terminal ................................. 12 [DEC/NO] button .............................. 11 Decay ................................................83 DELAY ............................................. 71 DELETE ........................................... 86 Delete .............................................. 146 Delete All ........................................ 146 Delete Measure ............................... 102 Demo Songs ...................................... 35 Destination Drum Kit number .......... 97 Destination measure number ........... 101 Destination Track number ............... 101 DeviceNo. ....................................... 131 DIGITAL OUT connector ................ 12 DIMM ....................................... 76, 147 DISPLAY ........................................ 140 DISTORTION ................................... 70 Double triggering ............................ 108 DRAM ...............................................76 DRUM ...............................................39 Drum Kit ......................... 30, 36, 40, 62 Drum Kit Bank ................................ 125 [DRUM KIT] button ......................... 10 Drum Kit icon ................................... 30 Drum Kit No ................................... 125 Drum Kit number .............................. 30 Drum Trigger ...................................... 7 Drum Voice ................................. 40, 62 Dry Level .......................................... 81 DTX900K ......................................... 16 DTX950K ......................................... 17

E Edge Shot .................................... 28, 29 Edit Indicator .................................... 14 Effect Parameters ........ 90, 91, 128, 129 Effect Types ...................................... 70 Effects ...............................................68 End (End Point) ............................... 139

Ending measure number of measure range ................................. 102 Ending measure number of source measure range ...................... 101 [ENTER/STORE] button .................. 11 Erase Measure ................................. 102 EXEC .............................. 114, 121, 123 [EXIT] button ................................... 11 EXT.KIT ......................................... 103 External Drum Kit ............................ 77 Extract ............................................. 146

F [F1] [F6] (Function) buttons .......... 11 Factory Settings ................................ 23 Fade In/Out ..................................... 144 Fast Forward ..................................... 37 [FILE] button .................................... 10 File name input location ........................................ 114, 115, 121 File Type ......................................... 113 File/Directory (Folder) selection box ........................... 114, 121 FILTER ........................................... 103 Filter .................................................. 83 Fine ................................................. 143 FLANGER & PHASER .................... 70 Flash ROM ........................................ 76 FootClosePosi (Foot Close Position) ...................... 126 FootSplashSens (Foot Splash Sensitivity) ................. 126 FREQ (Frequency) .......................... 127 Frequency ........................................ 136 Function ............................................ 95 Functions ........................................... 13

G GAIN .............................................. 127 Gain ................................................. 109 GAIN knob ....................................... 12 GATETIME ...................................... 87 Groove Check ............................. 50, 51

H Head Shot .......................................... 28 High Frequency ................................. 82 High Gain .......................................... 82 HI-HAT CONTROL jack ................. 12 Hi-Hat Controller ........................ 59, 95 Hi-Hat Cymbal .................................. 28 HI-HAT slider ............................. 11, 31 Hi-Hat Splash .................................... 28 Hold Mode ........................................ 94

I Icon ................................................... 97 [INC/YES] button ............................. 11

56 DTX900 Owners Manual

Index

A pp

en di

x

INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 6 jacks .........................................12 IndivOutGain ..................................124 INF ..................................................136 INFO (Information) ...........................93 INPUT .............................40, 41, 79, 80 INPUT (Trigger Input jack) ...........................................92, 109, 110 Input Lock ...........41, 79, 80, 86, 92, 94 InsConnect ......................................129 INSERT .............................................86 Insertion ............................................68 Insertion A (Insertion A Category/Type) ...........129 Insertion B (Insertion B Category/Type) ...........129 Internal Memory .........................76, 77

K KICK slider .................................11, 31 KIT ..................................................132 KIT NO. ..........................................133 KITLOCK .........................................36

L L&RGain .........................................124 LCD Contrast Control .......................12 LCD display ......................................10 LED Display .............................10, 125 Length .............................................144 LEVEL ............................................110 LIST ....49, 97, 100, 111, 123, 134, 145 Local Control ..................................130 LocalCtrl .........................................130 LO-FI ................................................70 Loop (Loop Point) ...........................139 Loop-Remix ....................................144 Low Frequency .................................82 Low Gain ...........................................82 LP=ST .............................................140

M manual .....................................107, 137 Mask Time ........................................94 Master Effect .....................................68 Master EQ .........................................68 MASTER slider ...........................11, 31 Meas (Insertion point) .....................102 Meas (Measure and beat) ................141 MEAS (Measure) ..............................37 Meas (Measure) .................................45 MeasLength (Measure Length) .........45 Measure ...........................................107 Measure Jobs ...................................101 Measure/Break ................................107 Memory Structure .............................77 Merge ..............................................131 Mic/Line ..........................................128 Mid Frequency ..................................82 Mid Gain ...........................................82 MID Q ...............................................82

MIDI Ch ............................................95 MIDI IN/OUT .................................131 MIDI IN/OUT connectors .................12 MIDI note numbers ...........................64 MIDI Out ........................................107 MIDI SW (MIDI Switch) ..................96 MIDI Sync ......................................131 MIDI Type ........................................95 MISC .................................................72 MISC slider .................................11, 31 Mix Track ........................................100 Mode .........................................93, 107 Module stand ...............................16, 17 Module stand fastening screws ... 16, 17 Mono/Poly .........................................84 Mono/Stereo ............................128, 136 Mute ..................................................29

N Name ...........................49, 97, 100, 145 NEW .......................................114, 121 Normalize ........................................143 Note ...................................................50 NOTE NO. ........................................87 Note number ......................................80 NUM ...............................................140 NUMBER (Chain number) ............. 132 Number of measures to be inserted .102

O Open Rim Shot ..................................28 Open/Close ........................................28 Optimize Memory ...........................146 OTHER .............................................39 OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks ...... 12 OutputSel ........................................128 OutputSel (Output Select) ......... 81, 107 Overdub .............................................43

P Pad .....................................................16 Pad Assign ......................................138 Pad Controller .............................59, 92 Pad Controller Type ..........................92 Pad Function ...................................126 Pad Song .....................................35, 93 Pad Type .........................................109 PadFunc ...........................................126 PAGE > ............. 80, 82, 84, 90, 91, 94, 128, 129 PAN ...........................................96, 103 Pan .............................................81, 128 Pan Depth ........................................124 PHONES jack ...................................12 PHONES slider ...........................11, 31 Pitch ................................................143 play ..................................................107 Play Count .......................................125 Play Mode .......................................139 play&rec ..........................................107 Practice Songs ...................................35

Pre ........................................... 128, 129 PRE.KIT ......................................... 103 Preset ........................................... 90, 91

Q Q (frequency bandwidth) ................ 127 Q (Resonance) ................................... 83 Quantize .................................... 44, 100 Quantize (Resolution) ..................... 100

R Ratio ................................................ 143 RcvKeyOff (Receive Key Off) ......... 84 Realtime Recording .......................... 43 REC ................................................. 136 rec .................................................... 107 RecCount ........................................ 125 Receive10ch .................................... 130 ReceivePC ....................................... 130 ReceivePC10ch ............................... 130 RecGain .......................................... 137 RecMonitor ..................................... 137 Recordable Size .............................. 136 Recordable Time ............................. 136 Reject Level From .......................... 110 Reject Level From ALL .................. 110 Reject Time ..................................... 110 Release .............................................. 83 Repeat ................................. 37, 93, 100 Repeat Playback ................................ 37 Replace .............................................. 43 REV SEND (Reverb Send) ....... 96, 103 Reverb ......................................... 68, 71 Reverb Effect Type ........................... 89 Reverb Pan ........................................ 89 Reverb Return ................................... 89 RevSend (Reverb Send) .............. 81, 95 Rewind .............................................. 37 Rhythm Gate ..................................... 52 Rhythm Gate Range .......................... 52 Ride Cymbal ..................................... 29

S Sampling ........................................... 65 [SAMPLING] button ........................ 10 Sampling Jobs ................................. 143 SaveTo ............................................ 145 Select ............................................... 145 SendHH ........................................... 126 SeqCtrl ............................................ 131 SET END > .................................... 140 SET NAME ............................. 114, 121 [SF1] [SF6] (Sub-Function) buttons ............................................... 11 SHAPE ............................................ 127 Slice ................................................ 145 SliderSel (Slider Select) .................... 85 SMF .................................................. 77 Snare ................................................. 28 Snare Buzz ........................................ 93 SNARE slider ............................. 11, 31

DTX900 Owners Manual 157

Index

1

Snares Adjust ....................................93 Snares On/Off ...................................92 SONG ..............................................132 Song Bank .......................................125 Song bank and number ......................46 [SONG] button ..................................10 Song Jobs ..........................................99 Song name .........................................35 Song Name, Tempo, Repeat ...........100 Song No ..........................................125 Song No (Song number) ...................93 SONG NO. ......................................133 Song number ...............................35, 99 SOURCE ...............................40, 41, 79 Source .............................................136 SOURCE (Trigger Input Source) .................86, 93, 94, 126 Source Drum Kit number ..................97 Source Song number .......................101 Source Track number ......................101 STACK/ALTERNATE COPY .........97 Standard MIDI file ............................77 Standby/On switch ............................12 START ............................................137 Start (Start point) .............................139 Starting measure number of measure range .................................102 Starting measure number of source measure range ......................101 STEP ...........................86, 87, 132, 133 Stereo to Mono ................................144 SUBDIVIDE ...................................105 SubDivide .......................................145 Sub-Functions ...................................13 Swing ................................................50 Switch .............................................128

T Tap Tempo ........................................34 TECH ................................................72 TEMPO .................33, 34, 38, 105, 133 Tempo .........................45, 95, 100, 141 Tempo Link .....................................125 TG SW (Tone Generator Switch) .....96 ThruPort ..........................................131 Time Signature ......33, 38, 45, 105, 141 Time Stretch ....................................143 Tom ...................................................28 TOM slider ..................................11, 31 Tone Generator .............................7, 57 TR1 (Track 1) ...................................39 TR2 (Track 2) ...................................39 Track .........................48, 100, 101, 102 Track (Recording Track) ...................44 Track Jobs .......................................100 TRANSMIT ..............................96, 103 Transport buttons ..............................11 TREMOLO & ROTARY ..................71 TrggrMode (Trigger Mode) ............137 TrigAltGroup (Trigger Alternate Group) .................94 TrigBypass ......................................126

[TRIGGER] button ........................... 10 TRIGGER INDICATOR .................. 11 Trigger Input ............................... 51, 52 Trigger Input jack ....................... 12, 60 Trigger Input jack as copy destination ....................................... 111 Trigger Input jack as copy source ... 111 Trigger Input Level Indicator ............ 22 Trigger Input Source ................... 58, 61 Trigger Level .................................. 137 Trigger No ....................................... 125 Trigger Setup .............................. 22, 60 Trigger Setup List ............................. 23 Trigger Setup number ....................... 22 Trigger Setup number as copy destination .............................. 111 Trigger Setup number as copy source ..................................... 111 Trigger Signals .................................. 58 TriggerNo .......................................... 22 TrigLink (Trigger Link) .................... 94 TrigMono/Poly (Trigger Mono/Poly) ......................... 94 TrigVelocity (Trigger Velocity) ....... 94 Tune ................................................124 TUNING ......................................... 106 Tuning ...............................................80 TYPE ............... 114, 115, 116, 121, 133 Type ...... 90, 91, 97, 128, 129, 144, 145 Type (Fade Type) ............................ 144 Type (Recording Type) ..................... 44

U USB terminals ................................... 12 Used/Total ....................................... 136 User Drum Kit ................................... 77 User Memory .................................... 76 User Song .......................................... 77 User Trigger Setups .......................... 77 User Voice ...................................... 136 User Voice bank and number .. 115, 146 User Voice bank and number as Destination ...................................... 146 User Voice bank and number as Source ............................................. 146 USR.KIT ......................................... 103 [UTILITY] button ............................. 10

V Variation ................................... 68, 144 Variation Effect Category ................. 89 Variation Effect Type ....................... 89 Variation Pan .................................... 89 Variation Return ................................ 89 Variation To Chorus ......................... 89 Variation To Reverb ......................... 89 VarSend (Variation Send) ................. 81 VCE NUM (Voice Number) ............. 96 VEL (Velocity) ............................... 110 VELOCITY LIMIT .......................... 87

VelSensDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) ............. 85 VelSensOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) ............. 85 Voice category .......................... 79, 106 Voice Job ........................................ 103 VOICE NUM (Voice Number) ....... 103 Voice number ............................ 80, 106 Voice Set ..................................... 40, 62 Voice Set category ...................... 40, 79 Voice Set number ........................ 41, 79 VOLUME ................................. 96, 103 Volume ........................ 80, 95, 124, 128 VOLUME (ACC) ........................... 105 VOLUME (eighth note triplet) ....... 105 VOLUME (eighth notes) ................ 105 VOLUME (quarter note) ................ 105 VOLUME (sixteenth notes) ............ 105 Volume Label ................................. 123

W WAH ................................................. 70

Z ZOOM , + ..................................... 140

58 DTX900 Owners Manual

DTX900 Owners Manual 159

About the Accessory Disk SPECIAL NOTICE The software included in the accessory disk and the copyrights thereof are under exclusive ownership by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which

the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this man- ual before installing the application.)

Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer.

Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

This disk is NOT for audio/visual purpose. Do not attempt to play the disk on an audio/visual CD/DVD player. Doing so may result in irreparable damage to your player.

Note that Yamaha does not offer technical support for the DAW software in the accessory disk.

About the DAW software in the accessory disk The accessory disk contains DAW software both for Windows and Macintosh.

Make sure to install DAW software under the Administrator account. In order to have continuous use of the DAW software in the accessory disk,

including support and other benets, you will need to register the software and activate your software license by starting the software while the computer is con- nected to the Internet. Click the Register Now button shown when the software is started, then ll in all required elds for registration. If you do not register the software, you will be unable to use it after a limited period of time expires.

If you are using a Macintosh computer, double-click the ***.mpkg le to start installation.

For information about the minimum system requirements and latest information on the software in the disk, check the web site below.

About software support Support for the DAW software in the accessory disk is provided by Steinberg on its website at the following address. http://www.steinberg.net

You can visit the Steinberg site also via the Help menu of the included DAW soft- ware. (The Help menu also includes the PDF manual and other information on the software.)

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (AGREEMENT) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (YAMAHA).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE.

THIS AGREEMENT PROVIDES YOUR USE-CONDITIONS ABOUT THE DAW SOFTWARE OF STEINBERG MEDIA TECHNOLOGIES GMBH(STEINBERG) WHICH IS BUNDLED WITH THIS PRODUCT. SINCE THE END-USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (EUSLA) SHOWN ON YOUR PC-DISPLAY IN YOUR INSTALLING THE DAW SOFTWARE IS REPLACED BY THIS AGREEMENT, YOU SHOULD DISREGARD THE EUSLA. THAT IS, IN THE INSTALLING PROCESS, YOU SHOULD SELECT AGREE WITH THE EUSLA, WITHOUT YOUR JUDGMENT THERETO, SO AS TO PROCEED TO THE NEXT PAGE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (SOFTWARE) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFT- WARE is owned by STEINBERG, and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. Yamaha has acquired the sublicense right to license you to use the SOFTWARE. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be pro- tected under relevant copyrights. You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup

purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permit- ted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamahas copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE.

You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE only when you transfer this product together, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or other- wise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates pub- lic policy. You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permis- sion by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modied without permission of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immedi- ately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamahas entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGI- BLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERA- TION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHAS ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN- TIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamahas total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or other- wise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE.

7. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of com- petent jurisdiction nds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect.

8. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized repre- sentative of Yamaha.

NOTE

MEMO

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the DTX900M Yamaha works, you can view and download the Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Yamaha DTX900M as well as other Yamaha manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Yamaha DTX900M. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Yamaha DTX900M Module Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.